You are on page 1of 217

GSM/EDGE BSS, Rel.

RG20(BSS), Operating
Documentation, Issue 08

Install

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II /
240 XL IIB
DN0932994

Confidential

Nokia Siemens Networks is continually striving to reduce the adverse environmental effects of
its products and services. We would like to encourage you as our customers and users to join
us in working towards a cleaner, safer environment. Please recycle product packaging and
follow the recommendations for power use and proper disposal of our products and their components.
If you should have questions regarding our Environmental Policy or any of the environmental
services we offer, please contact us at Nokia Siemens Networks for any additional information.

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the
use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which
the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted
in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The
documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,
and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY
OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION
IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective
owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2009. All rights reserved

f

Important Notice on Product Safety
This product may present safety risks due to laser, electricity, heat, and other sources
of danger.
Only trained and qualified personnel may install, operate, maintain or otherwise handle
this product and only after having carefully read the safety information applicable to this
product.
The safety information is provided in the Safety Information section in the “Legal, Safety
and Environmental Information” part of this document or documentation set.

The same text in German:

f

Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
Von diesem Produkt können Gefahren durch Laser, Elektrizität, Hitzeentwicklung oder
andere Gefahrenquellen ausgehen.
Installation, Betrieb, Wartung und sonstige Handhabung des Produktes darf nur durch
geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal unter Beachtung der anwendbaren Sicherheitsanforderungen erfolgen.
Die Sicherheitsanforderungen finden Sie unter „Sicherheitshinweise“ im Teil „Legal,
Safety and Environmental Information“ dieses Dokuments oder dieses Dokumentationssatzes.

2

Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Table of contents
This document has 217 pages.
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

DN0932994

1
1.1
1.2
1.3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the manual. . . .
Installation prerequisites . .
Handling of the modules . .

.......
.......
.......
.......

..............
..............
..............
..............

15
15
16
16

2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.1.1
2.4.1.2
2.4.1.3
2.4.1.4
2.4.1.5
2.4.1.6
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.5.1
2.5.5.2
2.5.6
2.5.7

Base station installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construction overview of the BS-types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configuration of different BS-variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations for BS-240XL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations for BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack mounted on a pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack shipped in a crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking of modules and batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B) . . . . .
Back-to-back assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
18
18
19
19
21
22
25
25
26
29
29
31
31
31
32
34
35
41
42
45
48

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.6
3.7
3.8

External cabling activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground and AC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground and DC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abis-interface - PCM link terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . .
Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abis-interface with ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of external alarm sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55
55
64
66
69
69
72
74
76
77
82
82
84
85
89
93

Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential

......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......

3

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4

3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.14.1
3.15
3.15.1
3.15.2
3.15.3

Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . . . 97
Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 100
Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 102
Alarm collection terminal ACTC-5 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 104
Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Antenna connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Preparation of antenna jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Installation of TMA or MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installation of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4.4.13
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.8
4.5.9
4.5.10
4.5.11
4.5.12
4.6
4.6.1

Rack completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Preparation of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Overview of battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Installation of backup batteries in service rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Installation of backup batteries type “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker” . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Battery alarm cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
-48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . 153
-48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . 154
-48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . 155
CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II . . . . . . . . . . 157
CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB, BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . 168
Battery cabling activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
-48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension . . . . . . 171
-48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension . . . . . 172
-48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension . . . . . . 177
DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension . . . . . 178
DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Combination of racks with different heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential

DN0932994

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist for Base Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Appendix . Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB DN0932994 4. . . . . . . . Installation of microwave equipment . . . . . . . . . . .3 4. .1 4. . . . . . .8. . . . . . . .9 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System cabling with semi-rigid cables . . . . . . . . .2 4. . Installation of modules and cover parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonstandard installation works .3 5. Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . .2 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks . . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB. . . . . . . . . . 183 183 188 189 193 196 199 199 203 203 205 207 209 210 210 210 5 5. . . . . . . .2 5. . . . . . . Terminators . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of the AC/DC frame . .2 4. . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 212 213 214 214 215 217 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential 5 .7 4. . . . Post installation notes .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of NTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary material . . .10 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS-240XLU II. Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racks . . . Setup of system cabling. . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Cabling with flexi-cables . . . . . . . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving the site . .1 5. . Installation of link equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 4.2 4. . . .12. .3. . . . . . . . . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . . . .8 4. . . .12 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . 35 Removal of top cover for crane eye access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Unpacking of the battery sets . 38 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Claws for the front feet before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Dismounting the rack from the pallet . . . . . 17 Position of the base station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet . . . . . . . 49 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . . . 23 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . 42 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . 37 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Site configuration . . . . . . 45 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB List of figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 6 ESD Symbol . . 19 Rack types of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Mounting of pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Opening of rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . lifting straps around the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . 48 Side-by-side configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Types of BS-240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Removal of the packing material. 37 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1) . . . . . . . opening of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Removal of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label . . 31 Rack mounted on the pallet . . . . . . . . 47 Back-to-back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Types of BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Removal of the straps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) . . . 44 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential DN0932994 . . 29 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Types of BS-240 II racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Floor and wall mounting of the racks . . . . . . 34 Opening of the PE-wrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Types of BS-240U IIB racks . . . . . . . . 49 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 120 Ω impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Ω) . .0/2. 82 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . 71 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment. . . . . . . . . . . 88 Assembly guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ACTM terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) . . . . . . 120 Ω) . . . . 72 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) . . 68 Preparation of a PCM-cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack . . 87 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . 70 Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment. . . . 86 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack. . . . . . . 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack . . . . . .3 coaxial connectors. 75 Ω) . 79 ETHCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Tools for jumper fabrication . 59 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connected via FE0 and FE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Locations of the connectors for external cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack . . . . 93 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240). . . . . 80 ETHCON trace adapter . . . . . . . . 92 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ETHCON module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Ground and AC mains connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .and power supply connections with -48V DC . . . . . . . . . 58 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack . 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack . . . . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 DN0932994 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 OVPTCOAX with 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Routing of external alarm cables . . . 89 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . 67 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240) . . . . . . . 65 Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Detail of the connection of battery 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Placement and connection of the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Parts of the air vent system . . . . . . 125 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential DN0932994 . . . . . . . . 134 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Routing of the air vent tubes . . . . 118 Example of pole mounting . . . . . 111 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . 123 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 8 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal of outer insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Contents of the connection kits . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oerlicon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A. 140 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL . . . . . . . . . 131 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Parts for battery fixing . . . 132 Connection of backup batteries (Co. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Placement of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dimensions of the antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) . . . 138 Terminal blocks for battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Configuration with HPDU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Preparation of the battery tray . . . 125 Placement of the sealing profile tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . 112 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . 117 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx . 110 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . 137 Connection between the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DUBIAS and TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA) . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Fixing of connector unit. . 111 Max. . . . . 115 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . 109 Removal of metal particles . . . . . 123 Paint retouch of the top cover . . . . . . 132 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Assembly of the connector unit . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . 147 Battery alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . 179 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL). 150 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A. . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) 154 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . ADP-2V1) 155 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . . . . E1 177 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks. . . . 158 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A. . . 148 Routing of the DC power supply wires. . . . . . . . 159 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks . . 153 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . . 184 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks185 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext. . . . . . 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240). . . 172 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A. . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 DN0932994 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A. . 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . 174 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II. . . . 162 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADP-2V1) . . . . 175 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A. . . . . . . 182 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks . . . . . . 171 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base. 157 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections . 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack. . . ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1178 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . 170 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC. . . . . 158 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . ADP-2V1) 176 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base. . 180 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack . . . . . 168 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M . 160 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing . . . . . . . 189 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential 9 . . . ADP-2V1). . ADP-2V1) . . 173 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks . . ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . 186 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADP-2V1) 156 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces. . . . . . . 170 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1 . . . . 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . .

199 Setup of the rubber sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Fitting of the air flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . 203 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Fixing variants of the modules . . . . . . . . . . 194 Interfaces on frame F:NT . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figure 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 10 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . 401) . . . . . . . . . 207 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential DN0932994 . . . . . . closing the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable. . . . 191 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Handling of the lever mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Connection of DC and battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Routing of the battery breaker cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Fitting of the fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Overview of NTPM cabling variants . . . . . . . 197 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . 200 Air duct mounting. . . . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Location of the code key no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Equipping variants. . . . . . . . . . . . BS-240XL Service2 rack . . . 51 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack . 73 Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB List of tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 DN0932994 Frame equipping variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM . . . . . . 127 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Types of flexible conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9. . . . 52 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . 119 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection . . . . . . . 140 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . 105 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37. . 127 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL) . . . . . . . 98 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL . . 52 Gap between Service1 and Base . . 54 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS-240XL Base and Extension racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1 . .X8 . . . . . 142 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential 11 . 80 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X4 . . 94 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Equipping variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω . . . BS-240XL Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Pin assignments ACTM connector X5. . . . . . . .. . . . . . 79 ETHCON trace adapter ports. . 96 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Pin assignments of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Battery charging modes . . . . . . .X4 . . . . 83 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω . . . . 53 Interrack-cables without extension . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 List of temp-resistor cables . . . . . .. . 128 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) . . 99 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 119 Types of the MHA . . . . . X10 . . . . . . . . . 28 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . .20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) 152 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . system cables ACOM . . . . . . . ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 List of CC-link cables BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 CC-cables l=3. . . . 154 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks . . 157 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . 161 CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II . . . 143 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . . . . . . . .FCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . 151 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A. . . . . . . . . . 159 CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 CC-cables l=6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECU. . . . . . . 167 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table 84 12 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . 145 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Id:0900d80580890e12 Confidential DN0932994 . . . . . . ADP-2V1) 153 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. . . . . ADP-2V1) 145 Battery sensor cabling . . . 214 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . 206 BS-240 II / 240 XL II. . 195 Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT 195 Module HW code key . . 173 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets) . . . . . 150 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks . . . . . . 197 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II . .10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . . 196 Relations between cover parts and modules . . . . . 186 Overview of Can-Bus cables . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . 169 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A. . . . ADPAV3) . . . 186 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units 192 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . 156 Example for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 List of CC-link cables BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Summary of changes Summary of changes Changes between document issues are cumulative. Issue 01 Date Summary 07/2009 First edition for release RG10(BSS) Issue 01 for release RG10(BSS) DN0932994 Id:0900d805805c3a78 Confidential 13 . the latest document issue contains all changes made to previous issues. Therefore.

Summary of changes 14 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Id:0900d805805c3a78 Confidential DN0932994 .

such as use of cable types with lower screening values. projectspecific documentation should be taken into account. power supplies. Where necessary. microwave etc. can lead to the CE requirements being violated. cable lists etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instructions provided with other equipment. 1.1 Purpose of the manual This document is intended to provide the information necessary for the installation of the BS-240 / BS-240 II and BS-240XL / BS-240XL II in the Base Station System (BSS). for example. antennas. The applying technical standards are listed in the “Guide to Documentation” (Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635). The document includes information on the following: – Equipment delivery – Preliminary checks – Unpacking the racks and devices – Rack installation in addition to information regarding the connection of the base station to: – – – – – – Power supply PCM .Network Site ground system Receive / transmit antenna system Alarm connections Mechanical and electrical connection of the racks For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (battery chargers. DN0932994 Id:0900d805805c36f7 Confidential 15 . It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrate it into the required infrastructure.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Introduction 1 Introduction f Important! The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cabling is undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentation listed there. Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup. such as mounting instructions. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the responsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.

– Use the correct material as described in this manual. Figure 1 ESD Symbol Notice: – Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. EN 50154 and the hints in this manual.2 Installation prerequisites It is required that the installer pays attention to all relevant national EMC standards. The modules are marked with the ESD-label.3 Handling of the modules All boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one contains electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD). output power of the BTS (cell coverage). The installation staff should have a basic knowledge of the relevant standards. The installation manual must be available for staff on site. – EMF standard relevant for the choice of the antenna. – Use the socket at the racks for wrist strap connection. – The modules must be transported in appropriate packaging.Introduction Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 1. do not touch connector contacts. These are sensitive to static discharge. – Installation according to the standards EN 50310 or ETS 300253. – The other equipment on site must be CE designated and must provide interfaces for connecting of external cables conformable to EMC instructions. – An ground high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules. Figure 2 16 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL Id:0900d805805c36f7 Confidential DN0932994 . – When handling the modules. the placement of the antennas and the max. 1.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 3 DN0932994 Introduction ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II Id:0900d805805c36f7 Confidential 17 .

to keep the critical hydrogen concentration below 4% vol. 18 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floor load requirements.1 Position in the system The BS-240/240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II interconnects the MS via the Um interface with the trunk network via the Abis interface. – Openings in walls. the site must have been prepared as follows: – The installing room should be free from possible water ingress. the installation room of the base transceiver station with integral battery back-up system must be guarantee a continuous ventilation. Um interface BT S Abis interface SB Mobile Statio n Figure 4 2.2 Asub BS C T interface A RA U interface MS C S Position of the base station within the SBS Site requirements The installation site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 50310 and EN 50174. be sure to find out with a building engineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2 Base station installation 2. heaters if necessary.must be complete. With regard to explosion hazards. – Room lighting and wall outlets must have been installed. If the floor load rating is unknown. The cross section of the air inlet / outlet must be calculated in accordance to IEC/EN50272-2.if required . The construction of the room in which the base transceiver station is to be housed must be complete and the room in good condition and dry (the humidity must not exceed 60 %). – Doors and windows must already have been installed and must be lockable. frost and excessive insect attacks. It is important. ceiling or floor . The BS-240 / 240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II are intended to be installed in an area with restricted access. IEC 61024 and IEC 61663 (in the future series IEC 62305-3 to IEC 62305-5) to achieve a lightning protection zone 1 interface to the communication equipment. The lightning protection measures must be in accordance with IEC 61312. should be placed inside the room. Prior to the commencement of installation.

The room must be clean. – Cable runways should be installed first. The dimensions of a BS-240XL / 240 XL II rack are 2025 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D) and BS-240XL IIB 1831 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (HxWxD).70 m x 1. including the circuit breakers in the AC-distribution panel (mechanically coupled).50 m must be provided (if later extension is not foreseen). 2. The Base rack and each optional Extension rack can be equipped with up to 8 Carrier Units.4 Site configuration Construction overview of the BS-types The base station equipment of the BS-240 / 240 II is housed in racks with the dimensions of 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). After that it is advantageous to install the BTS. after all other installation works to create the required infrastructure (power supply.3 Site configuration Operation of the base station requires additional equipment on site: microwave outdoor unit * TX/RX antennas external alarms** PCM24/30 2 Mbit/s 3 x 230V/50Hz AC (or -48 V DC) AC-counter/ main breakers in power distribution box *dependent on type of network integration **optional Figure 5 2.. – A minimum floor space of 1. The base rack and the extension rack of the BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240XL IIB can be equipped with up to 12 Carrier Units. – All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC power supply. antenna cabling. – Walls and ceilings should have been painted. To prevent subsequent accumulation of dust and dirt.) are complete. the parts and equipment units to be installed should be unpacked outside the room (if possible). must be finished. PCM line. The overall dimensions of the BS240 IIB are 1530 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D)..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation – Heating or air-conditioning systems should be ready for operation. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 19 .

a COSA has to be installed always into the base rack. providing all interfaces. 48. the serial interface controller (SELIC) providing the CU-interface and the BUS-interface to the COBA. Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT): Collect all alarms for those units having no access to the CAN-Bus and pass them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA. the advanced clock generation (ACLK). The ABISCON carries monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines and serves as interface for external synchronization clock. Each module contains a duplex filter.2) or Two-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 4:2). several cable kits will be used for cable connections between the racks. Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT): Protects the PMC30 ports of core boards from overvoltage and provides the monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines. that combines the TX and RX path together. the PCM30/24 Abis interfaces. 20 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link). the LMT interface and an interface to one satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA. Core Satellite (COSA): The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis interfaces and CC-links of the core. to be fed a common antenna. Antenna Combining Modules: Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identical modules. To provide a DUAMCO 8:2 functionality. Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the interface between the base rack and the peripheral Abis-cables. Co-Duplexer and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with a FDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration. the generating of system clocks. Carrier related modules: Carrier Unit (CU): Consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer and power amplifier. Because of the flexible configuration. The essential components are the framing and line interface (FALC) that provides the PCM30/24 port. the maximum number of TRX is limited to 24 with CUs and 48 with the use of FCUs. Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and based on the ECU. The priority tasks of the module are the local controlling of the BTSE. the internal system alarm interface. a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit. Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): For each frequency band one type of the FDUAMCO unit is available.and down link. The FCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. The first rack of Base Station is called Base rack and contains the following modules: Generic modules: Core Basis (COBA): Essential components are the base core controller (BCC). EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU): CU with supporting EDGE functionality in the up. To apply the feature cross connect. a DUAMCO 4:2 or DUAMCO 8:2 has to be used. routing data to the CU and handling and providing O&M messages. that can be configurated with jumper cables for the One-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 2. The necessary space for installation is shown in Figure 27.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB For a full-featured Base Station. a COAMCO8 is required in addition to the FDUAMCO. If more than 2 carriers have to be combined to a antenna system (with DUAMCO 2:2). The COSA will be controlled via a satellite interface by the COBA.

DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 21 . g NOTE All empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates so that the air flow inside the rack will not be affected. For the Base Rack to function a Service Rack can be installed close to the Base Rack. Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the tower mounted amplifier will be delivered by the DIAMCO. Every module contains an RX-filter. For each MDUX two HYBRID6 are available to change the standard 6:6 configuration to 12:6. – Extension rack: Contains up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB) or up to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB) and antenna combiners. backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration. 2. up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240IIB) or up to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ) and antenna combiners. in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOM module is used.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and is able to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX.and the RX-path to one antenna.4. – Service1A rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains up to 6 AC/DC converters. DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independend modules. if terrestrial line is used for the connection to BSC or microwave units. – Service2 rack: Contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration. Link Equipment (LE): Can be NTPM. Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays. an attenuator. Multiple Duplexer (MDUX / HYBRID6): The MDUX unit consists of six identical Modules (0…5). a second LNA and a power splitter. backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration. The base module can be expanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combined to one antenna. – Service1 rack: Contains AC/DC converters. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and can drive up to 8 receiver inputs. – Service2 rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains a DC-LE Breaker Panel with Alarm Collection Terminal. four RX outputs and one RX cascading output. In maximum 8 carrier. a low noise amplifier (LNA). Backup Batteries: Guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of mains breakdown or AC/DC converter failure. each having transmit and receive path with one antenna port. that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.1 Rack configuration of different BS-variants The following rack types exist: – Base rack: Contains the core modules. backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration. it contains all infrastructure equipment: AC/DC Converter (ACDC): Converts the AC mains voltage into the -48 Vdc supply voltage. Each module has one TX input. If only one Service Rack is located on site. an AC/DC distribution panel with Alarm Collection Terminal. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition.

additional Service2 racks can be added. 22 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . 2 Extension racks. The BS-240 / 240 II site can consists of up to a maximum of 8 racks (Base rack. The BS-240XL / 240XL II site can consists of a maximum of 7 racks (Base rack. The serving of a site with the maximum number of carrier units (24) requires the Base rack. The minimum configuration for a BS-240XL / 240XL II with maximum 12 carrier units requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional. The number of Service racks depends on the number of installed carriers on site. 2 Extension racks and a Service1 / Service1A rack.4.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB The minimum configuration for a BS-240 / 240 II with a maximum of 8 carrier units requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional. additional Service2 racks can be added. not needed in the case of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment). number of carrier units (24) requires the Extension rack. For extension of link equipment or battery backup time. Service1/Service1A rack. maximum 4 Service2 racks). The serving of a site with the max. Extension rack. 2.1 Rack configurations BS-240 Figure 6 shows the an example of rack types. Service1 rack / Service1A rack.1. not needed in the case of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment). For extension of link equipment or battery backup. that are needed for a BS-240 site with up to 16 carriers. the volume of required link equipment and the expected battery backup time. maximum 4 Service2 racks).

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB SIEMENS Base station installation SIEMENS SIEMENS LMT DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL ACT-C ACT-C ETHERNET ACT-C ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #1 #0 #2 #3 CU CU #0 #1 Service1 Rack Figure 6 SIEMENS CU #7 CU CU #2 #3 CU #4 CU #5 CU CU #0 #1 Base Rack MUCO #0 CU #6 MUCO #1 MUCO #0 CU CU #2 #3 COBA 0 COSA 0 COBA 1 COSA 1 LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 MUCO #1 AC + DC Distribution CU CU #6 #7 CU #4 CU #5 Extension Rack Rack types of the BS-240 SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC AC/ AC / AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 AC + DC Distribution CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 AC + DC Distribution LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution AC/AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC CTRL 10 CTRL 10 11 12 13 14 15 AC + DC Distribution 11 12 13 14 15 AC + DC Distribution LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 Figure 7 DN0932994 AC + DC Distribution LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 LE 6 LE 7 LE 8 LE 9 LE 10 LE 11 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 23 .

Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 DC-PANEL ACT-C DC-PANEL ACT-C LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 LE 6 LE 7 LE 8 LE 9 LE 10 LE 11 LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 LE 6 LE 7 LE 8 LE 9 LE 10 LE 11 Figure 8 24 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS 0V -48V FAN#0 ACTC FAN#1 FAN#0 BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 0V -48V FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07 BR08 LE Panel (S2) FAN#1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #1 #0 #3 #2 HU # 0 fo r LE HU # 1 fo r LE HU # 2 fo r LE HU # 3 fo r LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE AD Panel LE 180A +- 0V -48V FAN#0 FAN#1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #1 #0 #3 #2 ACTC BR 33 X29 -48V B E 1E2 BE 1E2 0 1 . The rack layouts. The rack layouts.2 Base station installation Rack configurations of the BS-240 II The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 II is equal to the BS-240.1..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2.3 Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the BS-240 II. (example of a DCsupplied 16 carrier site).4.4. Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates.1.- + - +++ FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 0V -48V CU #7 CU CU #2 #3 MUCO #0 CU #6 MUCO #1 MUCO #0 CU CU #2 #3 MUCO #1 160A LE Panel (S1A ) HU # 0 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE CU #6 CU #7 HU # 4 for LE FAN#4 FAN#5 FAN#4 FAN#5 CU CU #0 #1 Serv ice2 Rack Servi ce1A Ra ck COBA 0 COSA 0 COBA 1 COSA 1 160A 160A HU # 5 for LE CU #4 CU #5 Base Ra ck CU CU #0 #1 CU #4 CU #5 Extension Ra ck Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU) Figure 9 g Types of BS-240 II racks NOTE If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction with the extension modules HYBRID6. are shown in the following figure. excepted slots for link equipment and empty battery trays. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 25 . 2. MDUX#1 is allocated to the ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above). are shown in the figure below (example of a 16 carrier site). one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOM slot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1.

4. backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration) – Service2 rack (contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration) Refer to Table 1. Table 2.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base shelter Extension 1 shelter Extension 2 shelter DCP DCP DCP FAN 0 FAN 1 FAN 0 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 FAN 2 CU #7 CU #0 CU CORE CU #1 #2 CU #3 Figure 10 2.1.4 FAN 2 CU ACOM CU #5 #4 #6 FAN 0 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 FAN 3 CU #4 FAN 1 FAN 1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 FAN 3 FAN 2 FAN 3 CU #4 CU ACOM CU #5 #4 #6 CU #7 CU #4 CU ACOM CU #5 #4 #6 CU #7 CU #0 CU #1 CU #3 CU #0 CU #1 CU #3 CU #2 CU #2 Types of BS-240U IIB racks Rack configurations for BS-240XL The following types of rack exist: – Base rack (contains core modules. up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners) – Extension rack (contains up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners) – Service1 rack (contains AC/DC converters. Table 3 for a selection of rack configurations. 26 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .

installed modules Base Rack installed modules Extension rack 4 (top) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or 4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or 2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or 4 x FICOM modules (Base/Expansion modules in site specific configuration) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or 4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or 2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or 4 x FICOM modules (Base/Expansion modules in site specific configuration) 3 4 x CU or ECU 2 x DIAMCO 4 x CU or ECU 2 x DIAMCO 2 4 x CU or ECU 2 x DIAMCO 4 x CU or ECU 2 x DIAMCO 1 (down) 4 x CU or ECU 2 x COBA. 2 x COSA 4 x CU or ECU Table 1 DN0932994 Types of BS-240XL racks Frame equipping variants. BS-240XL Base and Extension racks Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 27 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB SIEMENS Base station installation SIEMENS SIEMENS DC-PANEL ACT-C FAN #0 FAN #1 AC/ DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC #00 #00 #01 #02 #03 #04 #05 CTRL DC-PANEL ETHERNET DC-PANEL ACT-C LMT ACT-C FAN #0 LE #0 LE #1 LE #2 LE #3 LE #4 LE #5 LE #6 LE #7 LE #8 LE #9 LE #10 LE #11 SIEMENS DC-PANEL ACT-C FAN #0 FAN #1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #3 #2 #1 ACOM #0 FAN #1 ACOM #1 ACOM ACOM #2 #3 AC + DC DISTRIBUTION FAN #2 FAN #2 FAN #3 FAN #2 FAN #3 FAN #3 #5 CU CU CU CU #10 #11 #4 #5 CU #9 CU CU #2 #3 MUCO #3 CU #4 MUCO #2 CU MUCO #3 DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC #01 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15 MUCO #2 AC/ CTRL CU CU #10 #11 AC + DC DISTRIBUTION 1/4 Battery 1/4 Battery FAN #6 CU #0 1/4 Battery 1/4 Battery 1/4 Battery Service2 Rack 1/4 Battery Service1 Rack CU #1 CU #8 FAN #6 FAN #7 CU #6 CU #7 Base Rack CU #0 FAN #5 MUCO #1 1/4 Battery MUCO #1 1/4 Battery CU #3 MUCO #0 #2 COBA #0 COSA #0 COBA #1 COSA #1 CU FAN #4 FAN #5 MUCO #0 FAN #4 CU CU #8 #9 FAN #7 CU #1 CU CU #6 #7 Extension Rack Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU) Figure 11 frame no.

type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4 type 5 4 (top) F:AC/DC1/1 2 F:AC/DC1/1 2 F:AC/DC1/1 2 F:AC/DC1/1 2 F:AC/DC1/1 2 3 F:LE F:LE F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 2 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:LE F:LE F:BATTERY F:BATTERY (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY 1 (down) F:BATTERY DC Output Power up to 4000 W Table 2 up to 8000 W Equipping variants.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Service1 rack frame no. type 2 (R:BS120) 4 (top) F:LE F:LE 3 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY 2 F:BATTERY F:BATTERY 1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY Table 3 28 type 1 (R:BS120) Equipping variants. BS-240XL Service1 rack Service2 rack frame no. BS-240XL Service2 rack Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .

excepted slots for link equipment and empty battery trays.6 Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the BS-240 II. 2. MDUX#1 is allocated to the ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above). are shown in the following figure. The rack layouts. EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU) or Flex Carrier Unit (FlexCU) Figure 12 g Types of BS-240XL II racks NOTE If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction with the extension modules HYBRID6. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 29 .- FAN#2 1 80 A +BR 33 X29 -48V B E1E2 B E1E2 HU # 5 for LE +++ ACTC 0 1 + - FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 0V -48V HU # 2 for LE HU # 11 for LE HU # 3 for LE #5 FAN#4 CU CU #2 #3 160A 160A CU #4 FAN#6 CU #0 Service2 Rack Service1A Rack CU #1 CU CU CU CU CU CU #10 #11 #4 #5 #10 #11 FAN#5 ACOM #4 HU # 1 for LE HU # 10 for LE CU 160A HU # 9 for LE 160A HU # 0 for LE CU #8 CU #9 FAN#7 COBA #0 COSA #0 COBA #1 COSA #1 LE Panel (S1A) HU # 7 for LE HU # 8 for LE ACOM #5 HU # 6 for LE CU #6 Base Rack CU #7 FAN#4 FAN#5 CU CU CU CU #2 #3 #8 #9 FAN#6 CU #0 CU #1 FAN#7 CU CU #6 #7 Extension Rack Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU).4.1. Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates. one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOM slot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1.1..4.5 Base station installation Rack configurations for BS-240XL II The rack layouts of the BS-240XL II are shown in the figure below (example of a 24 carrier site). (example of a DCsupplied 16 carrier site). SIEMENS SIEMENS 0V -48V SIEMENS FAN#0 ACTC SIEMENS FAN#1 ACTC ACTC LE Panel (S2) FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 HU # 0 for LE FAN#1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #3 #2 #1 HU # 1 for LE FAN#0 ACOM #0 ACOM #1 FAN#1 ACOM ACOM #2 #3 HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE AD Panel HU # 4 for LE LE .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2.

Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base shelter Extension shelter DCP DCP FAN 0 30 FAN 0 FAN 1 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #2 #3 CU #8 CU #8 CU ACOM CU CU #9 #5 #10 #11 FAN 2 Figure 13 FAN 1 FAN 3 CU ACOM CU CU #9 #5 #10 #11 FAN 2 CU #4 CU ACOM CU #5 #6 #4 CU #7 CU #0 CU CORE CU #1 #2 CU #3 FAN 3 CU #4 CU ACOM CU #5 #4 #6 CU #7 CU #0 CU #1 CU #3 CU #2 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .

1 Base station installation Equipment delivery Preliminary checks A ShockwatchTM -label and a TIP (N) TELLTM-label are fixed at the rack surface in the case of pallet transportation or at the crate for indication of fallover or strong shocks during the transport from factory to the site. In case of evident damage due to transport. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 31 . – – – – – – f Cut the two straps (1). the package has been shocked during transport. Shift the rack carefully from the transportation pallet.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2. 4- LABEL Figure 14 2.5. Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Cut the protection foil along the cardboard corner reinforcement (2) and remove it.2 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label Rack mounted on a pallet Unpack the rack according to the following instructions and in accordance with Figure 15. If the ShockwatchTM -label is red. WARNING! Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.. 3HOCKWATCH 4- LABEL 4)0. Unscrew the four fixing claws from the feet of the rack. Use only plate shears. Check whether the package is actually addressed to the site and complete. Retain the claws for later floor fixing of the rack. Check that the crate and label are proper condition. A second person is needed for help and to prevent the fallover of the rack. 4%.5. Remove the cardboard reinforcement on the top and from the corners of the rack. If the TIP (N) TELLTM-label arrow is blue. the package has been on the side or tipped over in transit.5 2. unpack the equipment in presence of an insurance company representative and promptly claim any damage and inform the shipper for specifying the damage.

as the burning packaging material may give off toxic gases. 190 kg. The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects). The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects). the crate can weigh up to approx.The crate dimensions for the BS-240 / 240 II are 1800 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD). 32 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . Depending on the pre-installed modules inside the racks. 2 1 2. Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.Base station installation f Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB WARNING! Do not burn the package.5.3 Figure 15 Rack mounted on the pallet Figure 16 Dismounting the rack from the pallet Rack shipped in a crate The racks are shipped vertically in wooden crates (or horizontally in case of transportation by airplane). Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries. The crate dimensions for the BS-240XL / 240XL II are 2225 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD).

DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 33 . Pay attention to the tension of the straps. – Remove the protection to the head and to the base of the rack. great care must be taken to ensure that the rack is not scratched or damaged in any way. During the unpacking steps. goods elevator). – Take the rack out of the crate with the aid of the straps around the rack. Unpack the rack according to the following figures. – Open and remove the tubular PE-wrap protecting the rack (see Figure 19). opening of the top cover WARNING! Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps. – Lift the rack in vertical position. – Remove the crates top cover. unscrew cu t Figure 17 f Removal of the straps. Use only plate shears – Cut the three straps (see Figure 17) and remove the 10 M4 screws on the top of the crate (see Figure 17). – Take out the packing material protecting the rack (see Figure 18). a second person is needed for help.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation All crates have the following information printed on them for identification of delivery: – Customer order number – Serial number of rack or other supplied equipment – Destination – Gross and net weight – Overall dimensions (cm) – Delivery papers For transportation of the crates from the unloading area into the construction room use handling aids (for example: fork-lift truck.

– Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries Proceed the unpacking of modules as follows: – Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape at the top. The battery sets of the Service1/2 racks will be shipped in wooden crates.5. including a plastic bag that contain cable sets. lifting straps around the rack Immediately after unpacking the rack.washers and the connection plates. Further the parts of the air vent system and the installation instruction. inspect it for damage and report the extent of any damage to the transportation company. – Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module. 2. f WARNING! The burning of packing material should be avoided.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 18 Removal of the packing material cu t Figure 19 Opening of the PE-wrap. 34 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . because packaging may give off toxic gases. screws. The packing material should be preserved for possible re-packing in future. Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental.

BS-240II. consult the site documentation to locate the installation point of the Base Station. – Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 35 . they must be screwed together to one common unit with one nut and screw M8x20 (part of MK:EMCRV1 for rack type I or MK:EMCR-2V1 for rack type II).Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation cu t Figure 20 Unpacking of the battery sets – Cut the tension belts with a plate shear. Further check the proper installation of the earthing bar and the necessary cable runways. it is necessary to remove the top cover of the rack. AC mains or power supply unit (if -48Vdc will be provided from external equipment) and the entry of the antenna cables into the construction room. – Remove the top cover of the wooden crate. (see Figure 21).5 Rack installation Prior starting the rack installation. – Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles. For this purpose the top cover has to be removed as shown in the figure Figure 21. f WARNING! Before opening the rack-door take measures to prevent the rack from falling over! Note the accident prevention regulations when working with a fork lift truck or crane! Don‘t remove the crane eyes after the crane transport is finished to guarantee the later EMI-closeness of the rack! If the racks stand side by side. the PCM24/30 network termination. BS-240 XL and BS-240 XLII racks as follows: – Open the rack-door and remove both screws in the upper part of the front of rack. – Lift up the top cover and slide it back. If the rack must be moved to the final installation position by crane and for later connection works. Proceed in case of BS-240.5. 2.

– Turn the handle counterclockwise 90° (4). 3 4 2 1 Figure 22 36 Opening of rack door Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB remo ve the scr ew s gro und wir e Figure 21 Removal of top cover for crane eye access For BS-240 II/ BS-240XL II rack type proceed as follows: – Open the rack-door (see Figure 22): Slide down the top cover (1). g NOTE If no Service1A rack is installed on site and the base station is powered by an external -48VDC source. – Slide the top cover 20 mm in front direction and lift it up (see Figure 23). – Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover. push the button behind the cover (2) and flap out the handle (3). the green/yellow ground connection wire between the top cover and the rack is not needed or provided.

Loosen both M10 nuts behind the door frame. Lift up the top cover and retain bolts and screws for later re-fixing of the top cover. Figure 24 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1) REARSIDE FRONTSIDE REARSIDE FRONTSIDE SCREWSANDNUTS- Figure 25 g DN0932994 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2) NOTE The top cover is fixed to the rack at the front side only. Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 37 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation 2 1 Figure 23 Removal of the top cover Remove the top cover (MK:ROOF-2BV1) of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB in accordance with the following figures: • • • Open the rack door.

Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 65° 60° BS-240 / 240XL Figure 26 38 BS-240 II / 240XL II Guideline for crane transport Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .

dimensions for 3-rack solution 1700 mm 450 mm min. side by side must not exceed 1mm Figure 27 DN0932994 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 39 . dimensions for double rack solution Note: *) Minimum clearance rear to wall for: BS-240 without earthquake kit close to wall BS-240 XL without earthquake mounting kit: 50 mm BS-240 XL with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K2131-X: 400 mm BS-240 II / 240XL II: 50 mm (without earthquake kit) BS-240 II / 240XL II with earthquake kit Siemens serial no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB **) **) 1900 mm 600 mm *) distance to wall 2350 mm 450 mm minimum room height Base station installation 750 mm BS-240XL 500 mm BS-240 2200 mm *) distance to wall **) 750 mm 450 mm 2025 mm 1600 mm min. S30861-K4119-X: 150 mm Minimum clearance by back-to-back assembly for: BS-240 II / 240XL II: 100 mm (without earthquake kit) BS-240XL: 100 mm (without earthquake kit) **) the distance between two racks.

If the position is incorrect. using the spirit level. 1 2 3 Figure 28 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet Proceed as described in the list below: – Check the correct vertical rack position.g. Depending from the rack type.Base station installation f Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB WARNING! The total weight of rack must not exceed 360 kg (BS-240 / 240 II) or 425 kg (BS-240XL / 240XL II) respectively when being lifted. right side). The four fastening claws. the necessary minimum distance must be considered from rear of the rack to the wall (see Figure 27). An right dimensioned additional distance piece can be helpful therefor. g NOTE To prevent the racks from tipping over (product safety) they must be fixed either to a wall (exepted in earthquake zones) or the floor. 40 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . The rack has two right angle brackets on its top rear for mounting to wall (Figure 29. – Push a claw (3) on each of the 4 rack feet and mark the drilling point on the floor. Fischer S8GK) into the holes. It is recommended to prepare the fixings before moving the rack to its final position. can be used for floor fixing of the racks. Alternatively the rack can be fastened to the wall. The minimum distance from the rear of the rack to the wall must be considered. For determination the weight refer to section “Technical Data”. – Remove the claws and drill the 4 holes and insert the 4 wall plugs (e. equalize the differences in the floor height by adjusting the rack feet (see Figure 28). – Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the rack feet (2) for proper floor contact by using the adjuster feet wrench. – Push the claws on the rack feet and fix them. Under no circumstances must the sets of batteries be inserted into the Service Racks during transportation on site. delivered with the rack. The doors must be kept closed during transportation.

Fischer FZE 18) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface. Fischer FZA 18x80 M10 I) into the inserting tool (e.g.5. – Drill the holes with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. – Shift the racks to the correct position. 4 1 2 3 2 x for rearside of rack Figure 30 DN0932994 2x for frontside of rack Earthquake mounting kit Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 41 . – Push a claw on each of the front side feeds and fix them with bolts and washers. so that each of the rear adjuster feet is placed in the cutout of a claw. 2. Don‘t pre-drill the holes! – Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 29 f Base station installation Floor and wall mounting of the racks WARNING! In earthquake zones. Use the earthquake mounting kit for securing to the floor. Fix in this way all claws for the rear side rack feeds first. the fastening to wall is prohibited.1 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2086-X) proceed in steps as follows: – Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 31. The distance plates are not needed for the front side row.5. – Put steel plug (e. – Fit bolts M10 (1) with washer (2) through both holes of claw (3) and distance plate (4). Drive the bolts into the steel plugs as fast as possible. – Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.g.

Fischer FZA 22x100 M12I) into the inserting tool (e.5. rack length 600 mm 423 mm 423 mm 57.5 mm 335 mm rack depth 450 mm 600 mm 88. 42 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .5 mm Figure 32 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) – Check the completeness of the mounting kit according to the following figure and remove the rear panel of the rack.Base station installation 600 650 0 50 485 535 32. Don‘t pre-drill the holes! – Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete. Fischer FZE 22) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface. – Drill the holes with 22 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. – Put steel plug (e. – Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.2 463 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2131-X) proceed in steps as follows: – Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 32.g.5 1085 1135 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 0 rear Service1 Rack Base Rack front Figure 31 2.5.g.

1 – Click spring nuts in the extrusions. setup the 4 metal angles (1) and fix them with Allan screw (6) as shown in Figure 34. – Insert both stiffening parts (2). 6 1 6 1 Figure 34 Mounting of pos. – Move the stiffening parts to rear and lateral side to stop.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation 1 4 2 5 4 2 5 4 4 5 6 3 5 3 4 4 Figure 33 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL – Remount the adjuster feet. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 43 .

It is absolute necessary. whilst work is being performed inside the rack. A second person is needed for help! The rack door stay must be locked in the open position using the door stay provided. 44 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . For mounting the earthquake mounting kit in a service rack. – Fix each stiffening part with 12 Allan screws M6 (4). that the edge pieces can work free of strain in the case of earthquake. f WARNING! Take measures to prevent the rack falling over during the removal of the adjuster feet and mounting of the metal angles. – Remove the 4 Allan screws (6). 3 6 4 5 Figure 36 3 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) – Fasten the rack to the steel plugs in the floor with 4 bolts M12 (5). – Mount again the rear panel.applying to your system.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB extrusion 6 2 6 4 Figure 35 3 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) – Slide in the filler plates (3). g NOTE g NOTE The use of the earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL requires a minimum clearance to the wall of 400 mm. . first the battery tray has to be remounted.

The mounting kit consists of the mechanical parts as shown in the figure below. The additional brackets improve the robustness of the rack against earthquake shocks.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2. 1 3 3 2 Figure 37 DN0932994 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 45 .5.6 Base station installation Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B) In areas with the possibility of earthquake use the mounting kit for Earthquake Zone 4 Rack (MK:EQ4RV2. S30861-K4119-X).

Don‘t pre-drill the holes! – Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete. so that each of the rear rack feet is placed in a cut-out of the double claw (Figure 38). – Tighten the connection to a torque of 60 Nm. HILTI . – Drill holes at the marked points with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 98 mm.M12*73 / 20) into the drilling holes and hammer them until the sleeve is flush with surface (use an inserting tool.Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Fix the rack to the floor in accordance with Figure 40 in steps as follows: – Mark the positions of the drilling holes onto the floor. 1 3 3 Figure 38 46 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 . – Place the double claw (1) at its mounting position and fix it with the provided bolts at the rear dowels (see Figure 38).g. – Insert a claw (2) on each of the front feet and affix them with the M12 bolts to the dowels in front of the rack (see Figure 39). – Put dowels (3) (e. – Clean out the drilling holes with a vacuum cleaner. if available). – Open the rack door. – Shift the rack to the appropriate position. – Tighten the bolts to a torque of 60 Nm.

5 wall 485 57.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base station installation 2 Figure 39 2 Claws for the front feet before mounting 465 450 600 142.5 (sketch without scale. all measures in mm) front side Figure 40 DN0932994 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 47 .

The mechanical equipment and cables necessary for connecting the racks are part of corresponding mounting kits. In this case additional mechanical support and sleeve equipment as well as extended cables. the DC-cables. but with distance between the sidewalls of racks.resistor cables will be routed from one rack to the other. These configuration are according to customer requirements. battery cables and the temp.5. An U-profile bar above the conduit will be used for routing of the Selic-bus-cables and CAN-bus-cable. g NOTE Other configurations with up to 5 m distance are possible and have to be defined for specific project.Base station installation 2. In this conduit. described in the following tables. 2500 mm *) Minimum clearance for BS-240 II / 240 XL II / 240 XL 1600 mm *)100 mm 750 mm conduit S30861-S2146-S Figure 41 48 Back-to-back configuration Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .7 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Back-to-back assembly Back-to-back assembly means all configurations that are not lined up in a connected row. are necessary. The open cable channel for inter-rack cabling from one rack to the other one has to be closed with an EMI shielded mechanical EMI-kit.

depend on rack type) Figure 43 DN0932994 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 49 .clearance of rear to wall.clearance of rear to wall. 5 m Z 450 mm Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 750 mm S30861-S2146-S conduit profile bar (Z.Base station installation max. depend on rack type) Figure 42 Side-by-side configuration S30861-S2146-S conduit Extension1 profile bar 2400 mm + 2 x Z Base 1500 mm Service1 Extension2 (Z .

depend on rack type) Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2 Detailed information about the wall distances (Z) of the different Rack types is described in the chapter 2. 50 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .Base station installation S30861-S2147-S conduit profile bar Extension1 Service2 Figure 44 2400 mm + 2 x Z Base 1500 mm Service1 (Z. In this case required components and extended cables have to be defined in accordance to customers requirements depending on length of flexible conduit.5.clearance of rear to wall. and cable no. The following tables informs about the mechanical components and typical cables for extension.5 / Figure 27. is given in Table 9.Measure “X” is the length of the flexible conduit and means also the additional cable length. Additional to the standard configurations of back-to-back assembly as shown in the figures of this section other configuration with distances up to 5 metres are possible. The relation between cables with Siemens code no.

”Types of flexible conduit” Table 5 DN0932994 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 51 .5 m otherwise use up to 5 m cable 112/4 2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. 278)+X 2) 1) replace fix installed cable by extended cable (+X) 2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. distance of AC/DC frame 2.”Types of flexible conduit” Table 4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service 2/1 DC cable Rack CAN-Bus cable Rack Selic cable Rack conduit Rack Service 1 Base Extension 1 distance “X” Extension 2 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E2 S1-E2 B-E2 E1-E2 1) (36)+X (249)+X (248)+X 1) (277.resitor cable Rack 1) (112/3) 1) (112/4) conduit Rack (249)+X 2) 1) max. 111/4)+X Temp. 111/3)+X (110/4.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Service 2/3 Service 2/2 distance “X” Base station installation Service 2/1 Service 1 S2/1-S2/2 Base Extension 1 Extension 2 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 E2-S2/2 DC cable Rack (33)+X CAN-Bus cable Rack Battery cable Rack (110/3.

distance from AC/DC frame to battery 5. ”Types of flexible conduit” Table 6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service 2/1 distance X Service 1 Base Extension 1 Extension 2 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-S2/1 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 DC cable Rack 3) (33)+X CAN-Bus cable Rack Battery cable Rack (110/2+ 111/2)+X (110/3+ 111/3)+X (110/4+ 111/4)+X Temp.resistor cable Rack 1) (112/2) 2) (112/3) 2) (112/3) conduit Rack 4) (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X 1) max.278 )+X conduit Rack 2) (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X 1) (36)+X (246)+X 1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X) 2) type of flexible conduit see Tab.278 )+X DC cable Rack CAN-Bus cable Rack Battery cable Rack 1) (277.Base station installation Service 2/2 Service 2/1 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Service 1 Base distance X Extension 1 Extension 2 S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-E1 S1-E2 1) (35)+X B-E1 B-E2 1) (277. otherwise a special must be defined 3) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X) 4) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit” Table 7 52 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .5 m. otherwise use cable 112/3 2) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 2.5 m.

are typical cables for interrack-cabling without extension. 111/2 S30864-X211-A47 110/3. Siemens code no. 111/3 S30864-X211-A48 110/4. ”Types of flexible conduit” Table 8 Gap between Service1 and Base The following cables with Siemens code no. The installation requires the temporary removal of the plate. DN0932994 Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential 53 . located at the top of EMI-panel. cable code no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service 2/1 DC cable Rack CAN-Bus cable Rack conduit Rack Base station installation Service 1 distance X Base Extension 1 Extension 2 S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-B (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X S1-E1 1) (34)+X 1) (35)+X (245)+X (246)+X S1-E2 1) (36)+X 2) 1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X) 2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. 110/2. 111/4 S30864-X211-A49 112/2 S30864-X211-A44 112/3 S30864-X211-A45 33 Component of S30864-X211-A29 34 Component of S30864-X211-A29 35 Component of S30864-X211-A29 36 Component of S30864-X211-A29 245 S30864-X210-A11 246 S30864-X210-A12 247 S30864-X210-A13 248 S30864-X210-A14 249 S30864-X210-A15 277 S30864-X210-A2 278 S30864-X210-A2 Table 9 Interrack-cables without extension The cables 33-36 are fix installed in the Service1 rack and have to be replaced by extended according to back-to-back configuration.

00 m) Table 10 g 54 C50324-Z200-C21 Types of flexible conduit NOTE Each added rack requires a separate ground connection to the nearest grounding bar on site! Id:0900d805806f3dbf Confidential DN0932994 .Base station installation Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB flexible conduit Siemens code no.625 m . type 1 (distance 0.40 m) C50324-Z200-C22 type 2 (distance 1.5.2.25 m .

3-phase supply – By using of DC power supply: DC mains terminal block 2 pole .power distribution panel of 230 Vac.signalling link terminal – Alarm collection terminal .power distribution panel of -48Vdc – Ground bolts -> ground bar – Abis interface -> NTPM (in case of transmission via terrestrial lines) – Abis interface -> Microwave indoor units (if µW equipment is used for transmission) – Microwave indoor units -> Microwave antennas – Transmit / receive antenna connectors .ground bar optional: – Serial interface .antenna system – Ground strip of antenna cable shields .1 Overview This chapter provides the information required for installing the external cables between the Base Station and the infrastructure equipment on site. The rack cannot function without thefollowing cable connections: – In case of AC power supply: AC mains terminal block 5 pole . DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 55 . For cable installation the top cover has to be removed.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities 3 External cabling activities 3.external alarm sensors All interfaces excepted the antenna connectors are located at the EMI panel below the top rack cover. For lift-up remove the bolts in the top extrusions.

..1CU 0.3 CAN OUT CAN IN CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-Plate Figure 46 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .2 CU 4.....External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ground bolt s OVPT0 OVPT1 Ext..3 Ext.2 CU 0...7 CU 0.. 7 Ext.7 Ext...1 CU 4. 4 CAN OUT -48 V CAN TEST Serial IF LPA MSU PE-Plate Figure 45 ACTM Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack ground bolts CU 4.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities ground bolts CAN OUT CAN IN CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-Plate Figure 47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack ground bolts CAN OUT CAN IN CAN TEST LPA PE-Plate Figure 48 DN0932994 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 57 .

1 CU 4.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ground bolt s OVPT0 OVPT1 Ext.3 CAN OUT CAN IN CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-Plate Figure 50 58 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 ..1 CU 0..1 CU 8...7 -48 V CAN TEST Serial IF Ext.11 CU 4...11 CAN OUT Ext...7 CU 0....3 LPA MSU PE-Plate Figure 49 ACTM Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack ground bolts CU 8..

..3 Figure 52 DN0932994 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 59 .7 Ext..2 CU 4..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities ground bolts OVPT0 CAN IN OVPT1 -48 V CAN OUT Serial IF CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-bolts ACTM Ext...2 CU 0.1 CU 0.3 Ext....7 CU 0.7 Ext.3 Figure 51 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack ground bolts CAN IN CAN OUT CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-bolts CU 4..1 CU 4...

External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ground bolts CAN IN CAN OUT CAN TEST LPA PE-bolts MSU Figure 53 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack ground bolts CAN IN CAN OUT CAN TEST LPA PE-bolts Figure 54 60 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .

7 CU 0..7 Ext..11 CU 4..1 CU 8..3 Figure 55 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack ground bolts CAN IN -48 V CAN OUT CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-bolts CU 8..11 Ext..1 CU 4.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities ground bolts OVPT0 CAN IN OVPT1 -48 V CAN OUT Serial IF CAN TEST LPA MSU PE-bolts ACTM Ext..1 CU 0.....3 Figure 56 DN0932994 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 61 ..

15 Figure 57 ACTM Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack Some additional hints for the installation of external cabling: – The first cable that has to be installed is the ground cable between the main ground bolt on top of the rack and the nearest ground bar on site. – If cables are fed through coaxial cable access located at the top of the rack at the front. Base. – The second installation step is to connect the ground bolts of the different racks in series.. – After that all other cables e..23 CU 8. – The screen of the RF jumpers has to be grounded before entering the BTSE via the cable feeding module.g. 62 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .23 Red CU 8. RF cabling or alarm wires can be installed.15 Red CU 16. AC mains.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB PCM 0 PCM 1 CAN-IN Serial-IF CAN-OUT CU 16.... The following figure shows the location of the external interfaces of the BS-240/240XL (example of BS-240 with Service1-.and Extension rack). the screen has to be grounded like all other coaxial cables.... see Figure 102.

PCM1) antenna cables 3 x 230 Vac ** -48 Vdc* ground cable microwave SIEMENS SIEMENS LMT ETHERNET SIEMENS LMT DC-PANEL ACT-C AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ DC DC DC DC DC DC DC CTRL #0 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 LMT DC-PANEL ACT-C ETHERNET ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #0 #1 #3 #2 ETHERNET DC-PANEL ACT-C ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM #1 #0 #2 #3 CU CU #0 #1 Service1 rack CU #7 CU #4 CU #5 Base rack CU CU #2 #3 CU CU #0 #1 MUCO #1 CU #6 MUCO #0 CU #3 MUCO #1 CU #2 COBA 0 COSA 0 COBA 1 COSA 1 LE 0 LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 MUCO #0 AC + DC Distribution CU #6 CU #7 CU #4 CU #5 Extension rack *) only used if an external DC-power supply is available **) if an external 3 x 230 V ac power supply source will be used Figure 58 DN0932994 Locations of the connectors for external cables Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 63 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities serial interface cable external alarms / commands Abis lines (OVPT PCM0.

– Cut the cables to the required length. An external ground wire (16 mm2.External cabling activities 3. 15 mm) and mount the cable lug M8. These connections are not ground connections! 64 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . copper conductor) is installed. BS-240 II. BS-240XL II Figure 59 f Ground and AC mains connections (example) WARNING! Note. BS-240. – Connect the prepared cable end to the ground bolt. alternative solution for rack grounding 50 mm2 main ground wire 16 mm 2ground wires ground wire bridges H07-RN F 5 G41) AC distribution AC counter 3 x 25 A main breakers2) 3 x 32 A main breakers3) 3 x 230 Vac mains connection to ground 1) cross section needed depend on the cable length between external breaker and MSU 2) BS-241. it is possible to connect each rack on the shortest way to the main ground using 16 mm2 copper wires. If on site a main ground wire (50 mm2. – Measure the distances between the connection points of the ground system and the ground bolt of the rack. All adjoining racks will be grounded using a prefabricated wire bridge and is connected to top left and right corners of each rack respectively. BS-240XL 3) BS-241 II. – Remove the cable covering at the end to connect to the ground bolt (length approx. – Firmly tighten the nut.power supply connections The racks have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting the connection of AC mains cable. that the connection by screws at the top of racks standing side by side are mechanical connections only.2 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Ground and AC. Connect the racks to the ground system as follows: – Use the nearest ground bar on site. copper conductor) has to be connected on the upper left side grounding bolt of the rack which must be attached to the ground bar on site.

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

External cabling activities

The figure above shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and ground
connections. The recommended cable types guarantees the proper function of the base
stations, equipped with up to 24 carriers.
An easily accessible disconnect device is incorporated into the AC mains supply wiring.
To isolate the mains supply, a circuit breaker has to be fitted in each phase inside the
AC distribution box close to the base station (see Figure 59). The disconnect devices
shall simultaneously interrupt all phase conductors.
A 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the top of Service1 / Service1A rack, is
the connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz, 20 A per phase.

PE L3 L2 L1 N

Figure 60

Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack)

This warning must appear in the original German text:

f

WARNING!
Vor Anschluß des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, daß das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Maßnahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.

f

WARNING!
AC supplied BTS versions, remotely disconnected from power supply: Service personnel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disconnect device) of the
relevant Base Station - which is remotely disconnected from external power - are
switched off before beginning with any Service&Maintenance activities. This is to deenergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards)
An imprint, located on the front panel of the AC frame gives instruction how to deenergize the base station:
To deenergize entire unit:

DN0932994

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

65

External cabling activities

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

1. “Switch OFF the battery breaker BR33 at the AD-panel of the Service1 to deenergize DC circuit”
2. “Switch OFF the AC breakers BR21, BR22, BR23 to deenergize AC circuit”
To connect the BS240/240XL with the AC mains connection point perform the following
steps:
– Remove the bolts in the top extrusions to loosen the roof.
– Lift-up the roof sections carefully, to avoid damages of the paint coat.
– Refer to the site documentation for information about type and location of the AC distribution.
– Measure the distance between terminal block of the MSU and AC distribution.
– Cut the cable to the required length.
– Make sure that the protection earth wire (PE) is approx. 2 cm longer as the phase
conductors and the N-wire.
– Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end, that
is to be connected to the terminal block.
– Fix the cable at the strain relief with cable ties.
– Insert the wires into the terminals. Use a screwdriver for opening the terminal
springs. Check that all wires are in fixed position.

3.3

Ground and DC- power supply connections
For connecting the base station with an external -48 Vdc power supply unit a
Service1/Sevice1A Rack is not needed.
Depending on the site-specific power supply configuration, the racks have to be connected directly with the power supply unit or via a power distribution panel.
The following figure shows the power supply configuration for the BTS, including a
power distribution panel.
The power supply unit, as shown in Figure 61, is intended to be supplied by a -48 Vdc
centralized battery source. The charging rectifiers must be internally insulated from the
AC mains by insulating transformers.
The positive pole of the backup batteries has to be connected to ground.

66

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

External cabling activities

main ground wire 50 mm2

alternative solution for rack grounding
DC main wires
2
2 x H 07 V-R 16 mm *)
2
2 x H 07 V-R 35 mm **)***)

ground wire
2
H 07 V-R 16 mm
(yellow/green)

main breaker

ground
wires

UE -48 V DC +

optional
power distribution
panel

2

H 07 V-R 35 mm
power supply
unit

fuse per rack:
50 A *)
80 A **)
100 A ***)
DC supply +0 V pole
connected to ground
backup
batteries

battery +0 V pole
connected to ground

Figure 61

g

DN0932994

ground bar
2
*) BS-240 / Service2
50 mm
**) BS-240XL / BS-240 II
***) BS-240XL II

Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC

NOTE
In case of a DC supplied BS-240 II Base and Extension rack, an external DC circuit
breaker with a (recommended) minimum rating of 80 A has to be fitted per rack (see
figure above). The maximum rating is 100 A if an OEM external power supply rack
requires it.

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

67

External cabling activities

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Installation of the DC wires is as follows:
– Measure the distance between rack and the power supply unit or power distribution
panel.
– Cut the wires to the required length.
– Remove the cable insulation (length approx. 12 mm) at the ends to be connected to
the terminal block of the MSU (the location is shown in Figure 62).
– Insert the prepared ends into the terminal block.
– Pay attention to the correct polarity of the connection from BTS to the DC output of
the power supply unit.

-48 V + 0 V

Figure 62

Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240)

For installation of the ground connection proceed as described in section 3.2 of this
manual.

68

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

DN0932994

1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance Before starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT or the ABISCON.4 External cabling activities Abis-interface . 3. The cable shielding must be connected to the relevant ground pins as close as possible (in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects). Two types of ABISCON/OVPT exist: – ABISCON/OVPT for 120 Ω cables (balanced) – ABISCONCX/OVPTCOAX for 75 Ω cables (coaxial) g NOTE If the connection point for the Abis line (e. in order to fulfill the requirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according to PCM standards.2-120 GR FRNC – Coaxial cables for 75 Ω wiring.PCM link terminal The Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1. prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.6/1.5. provides the communication links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.4/2. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 69 . NTPM or microwave equipment) is outside the building where the BTSE is installed.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 3.. Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use: – Screened cable containing shielded twisted pairs for 100/120 Ω PCM lines • 09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.4. located on the EMI panel. do not route up-link and downlink PCM lines in one common cable.g. e. The Abis interfaces can be terminated with an ABISCON (without Overvoltage Protection for indoor applications) or with an optional Overvoltage Protections (OVPT) which protects the boards inside the rack against overvoltage (residual voltage < 1 kV). an OVPT module has to be installed always. The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable.g. g NOTE Use only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding! If cables should be used without shielded twisted pairs.6/1. 2YCCY 0.2 • 09YS(ST)CY 16x2x0.

#12 AWG).g. The terminal block of the OVPT/ABISCON allows the connection of wires with a cross-section range between 0. no.08 mm2 and 2. Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided shield (4).External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 2 1 Figure 63 3 4 5 Preparation of a PCM-cable. Remove approx. Figure 64 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) – Fix the cable at the stress-relieving by straps or screw down the screen clamps. 120 Ω impedance – – – – Cut the cable to the required length (1). the outer diameter of the PCM cable must not exceed 8 mm.13 cm (2). – Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation. Cut back the outer insulation approx.Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires. – Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e. – Insert the wires into the terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON. that will be attached at the stress relieving bracket. 11 cm of the braided shield (3). 24). g NOTE If screen-clamps should be used. 70 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . – Wrap the exposed cable screen.5 mm2 (#28 .

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities – Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest route (that means without sleeves) between the stress relieving and the screw terminals. A B PCM 3 B A PCM 2 A PCM 1 Up Link = TX Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment. 120 Ω) Figure 65 Down Link = RX B A 1 3 2 4 B A PCM 8 B A 5 7 6 B A B A 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 B A B PCM 7 A B PCM 6 A PCM 5 Up Link = TX Figure 66 DN0932994 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment. – All unconnected PCM lines (4 wires per line) must be connected to one of the ground terminals.3 connectors and monitoring interface connectors. 120 Ω) Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 71 .use suitable stress relief measures! B A 1 3 2 4 B A B A 5 7 6 A B A 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 B PCM 4 B EXT SYNC A Down Link = RX EXT SYNC B The pin assignments of the ABISCON is equal to the pin assignments of the OVPT and shown in the following figures.0/2. Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under mechanical tension . g NOTE The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1.

2 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm The Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by use of 9 1.3-female connector for each PCM-up and down line at the end to be connected to the ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX. – Use a torque spanner for 1.use suitable stress relief measures! Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . Make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not fixed under mechanical tension .External cabling activities 3. located at the ABISCONCX or at the OVPTCOAX (shown in Figure 67).4/2. holes for stress relieving PCM line connectors Figure 67 OVPTCOAX with 1. – Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.0/2. The coaxial cables will be prepared as follows: – Fix a 1.0/2.0/2.3 coaxial connectors.5.g.4. g 72 NOTE The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1.3 connector (35 Ncm). 2YCCY 0.3 coaxial connectors.0/2.0/2.3 coaxial connectors. – Connect the prepared cable to the matching connectors. 75 Ω) For Abis cabling with 75 Ω impedance use coaxial cable e.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB signal coax connector signal coax connector PCM1-ULA 1 PCM3-DLA 6 PCM1-DLA 2 PCM4-ULA 7 PCM2-ULA 3 PCM4-DLA 8 PCM2-DLA 4 EXTSYNCA 9 PCM3-ULA 5 --- --- Table 11 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0. 75 Ω Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 73 . 75 Ω signal coax connector signal coax connector PCM5-ULA 1 PCM7-DLA 6 PCM5-DLA 2 PCM8-ULA 7 PCM6-ULA 3 PCM8-DLA 8 PCM6-DLA 4 --- 9 PCM7-ULA 5 --- --- Table 12 DN0932994 External cabling activities Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1.

DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A 22 PCM 4 .ULA PCM Line 4 Up Link A 21 PCM 4 . a SUB-D25 female connector is the direct interface for the PCM links.DLB PCM Line 4 Down Link B 23 GND/G shield pair 8 12 EXTSYNCA 24 EXTSYNCB 25 GND/G 13 GND/G Table 13 74 Signal name main cable shield Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B 3 GND/G shield pair 2 4 PCM 2 .ULB PCM Line 3 Up Link B 8 GND/G shield pair 5 7 PCM 3 .ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B 3 GND/G shield pair 1 2 PCM 1 .ULA PCM Line 3 Up Link A 19 PCM 3 .DLA PCM Line 2 Down Link A 17 PCM 2 .DLB PCM Line 3 Down Link B 8 GND/G shield pair 6 9 PCM 4 .DLA PCM Line 3 Down Link A 20 PCM 3 .DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A 15 PCM 1 . if these function is not needed.External cabling activities 3.ULB PCM Line 4 Up Link B 11 GND/G shield pair 7 10 PCM 4 .ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A 14 PCM 1 . g NOTE Without OVPT no monitoring possibility is provided.ULB PCM Line 2 Up Link B 18 GND/G shield pair 3 5 PCM 2 .ULA PCM Line 2 Up Link A 16 PCM 2 .DLB PCM Line 2 Down Link B 18 GND/G shield pair 4 6 PCM 3 .4. SubD 25 Function 1 PCM 1 . Pin no.3 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON Without the ABISCON / OVPT or ETHCON.

ULA PCM Line 5 Up Link A 14 PCM 5.DLA PCM Line 6 Down Link A 17 PCM 6 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pin no.ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B 3 GND/G shield pair 1 2 PCM 5 .ULB PCM Line 7 Up Link B 8 GND/G shield pair 5 7 PCM 7 .DLA PCM Line 7 Down Link A 20 PCM 7 .DLB PCM Line 7 Down Link B 8 GND/G shield pair 6 9 PCM 8 .ULA PCM Line 7 Up Link A 19 PCM 7 .DLB PCM Line 8 Down Link B 23 GND/G shield pair 8 12 --- 24 --- 25 GND/G 13 GND/G Table 14 DN0932994 External cabling activities main cable shield Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 75 . SubD 25 Signal name Function 1 PCM 5 .DLA PCM Line 5 Down Link A 15 PCM 5 .DLB PCM Line 6 Down Link B 18 GND/G shield pair 4 6 PCM 7 .DLA PCM Line 8 Down Link A 22 PCM 8 .DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B 3 GND/G shield pair 2 4 PCM 6 .ULB PCM Line 6 Up Link B 18 GND/G shield pair 3 5 PCM 6 .ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A 21 PCM 8 .ULA PCM Line 6 Up Link A 16 PCM 6 .ULB PCM Line 8 Up Link B 11 GND/G shield pair 7 10 PCM 8 .

3 PCM 4.ULA 3.ULB 2. Figure 68 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 connector 3 connector 2 connector 1 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT The following tables show the pin assignment for the monitoring interfaces.4.2 PCM 2 .DLA 2.DLB 1.4 PCM 1 .1 PCM 4 .ULA 1.ULB 1.DLB 3.5 EXTSYNCA 2.2 PCM 1 .5 PCM 2 . The pin arrangement is shown in figure below.6 EXTSYNCB Table 15 76 Signal name Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . connector / pin connector / pin Signal name 1.4 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT The ABISCON / OVPT provides 3 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring the PCM lines.6 PCM 3 .DLB 2.ULB 3.External cabling activities 3.4 PCM 4.1 PCM 2 .3 PCM 3 .DLA 2.2 PCM 4 .3 PCM 1 .DLB 3.6 PCM 2 .1 PCM 1 .ULA 2.4 PCM 3 .5 PCM 3 .ULB 1.DLA 1.DLA 3.ULA 3.

4 PCM 5 .5 EXTSYNCA 2.1 PCM 8 .ULB 3. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 77 .DLB 3.5 PCM 6 .2 PCM 6 .ULA 2.3 PCM 7 .DLA 3.DLA 2.2 PCM 5 . The ETHCON can only implemented in conjunction with this type of core module. FE1) and optical cables via the two optical interfaces (SFP2. SFP3).5 Signal name External cabling activities Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1 Abis-interface with ETHCON The ETHCON module allows the connection of Abis lines with copper wires via two Fast Ethernet interfaces (FE0.2 PCM 8 .6 EXTSYNCB Table 16 3.DLB 2.ULB 2.ULB 1.4 PCM 7 . The ETHCON is always fitted at the SubD25 plug-in position “PCM 0” as this connector is the interface to the core module CESCOBA.6 PCM 6 .1 PCM 5 .DLA 1.6 PCM 7 .3 PCM 8 .4 PCM 8 .DLB 3.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB connector / pin connector / pin Signal name 1.ULA 3.4. The following figure gives information of the connector arrangement of the ETHCON module.ULB 1.ULA 1.DLA 2.5 PCM 7 .1 PCM 6 .ULA 3.DLB 1.3 PCM 5 .

SFP-modules have to be inserted into the cage of ports SFP2 & SFP3. g NOTE Pay attention to the minimum bending radius of the optical cables. To allow the connection of fiber-optic cables.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB stress relieving clip ETHCON TRACE EXT_CLK SYN_C MonA MonB SFP 3 GND SFP 2 EXT_CLK SYN_A EXT_CLK SYN_B Figure 69 FE 0 FE1 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module A 8-wire / twisted pair copper cable with a nominal impedance of 100 Ohms per pair has to be used. duplex-fiber-optic cables with multimode fiber type according to ISO/IEC9314-3 and LC-duplex plug according to IEC61754-20 have to be used.or S/UTP). The cable requires a 8P8C RJ45 plug at the end to be connected to the FE0 / FE1 interface. Fix the cables at stress relieving facilitys with cable ties. The required SFP-module type has the part-number V50017-U364-K500. For optical connections. A common outer cable screen is mandatory (cable type S/FTP. The interfaces FE0 and FE1 are implemented so a 2nd BTS can be connected in a kind of physical multidrop configuration. 78 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .

signal GND 2 1 Monitoring EXTSYNC A EXT_CLK_SYNC_A 4 3 Monitoring EXTSYNC B EXT_CLK_SYNC_B 6 5 EXT_CLK_SYNC_C Table 17 DN0932994 terminal no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 70 External cabling activities ETHCON module. Therefore. The cables have to be fixed at the stress relieving clip of the ETHCON module‘s cover part. The terminal arrangement of the external clock interface EXTCLOCK is given in the following table. connected via FE0 and FE1 The ETHCON module provides the possibility to connect external balanced or unbalanced clock signals to its spring terminal block. signal terminal no. Terminal arrangement for external clock connection Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 79 . twisted pair or coaxial copper cables can be used.

external clock connection The trace connector of the ETHCON allows the monitoring of ethernet traffic. a 2x6 pin. signal pin signal Logical Port 5 RXN A1 B1 Logical Port 5 RXP Logical Port 5 TXP A2 B2 Logical Port 5 RX center Logical Port 5 TX center A3 B3 Logical Port 5 TXN Logical Port 4 TXN A4 B4 Logical Port 4 TXP Logical Port 4 RXP A5 B5 Logical Port 4 TX center Logical Port 4 RX center A6 B6 Logical Port 4 RXN Table 18 80 pin ETHCON trace adapter ports.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB spring terminal block terminal no. An adapter called "ETHCON TRACE" (part-number S30861-U2530). wire bridge 0. 1. pin arrangement Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . Therefore.8 mm coaxial cable twisted pair cable Figure 71 ETHCON.27mm grid connector is provided.8 mm 3 3 1 1 5 5 4 4 6 6 outer cable shield 2 2 outer cable shield wire bridge 0. The pinning of the RJ45 sockets is as shown in the following table. that includes ethernet magnetics and RJ45 connectors has to be attached to the trace connector. terminal no.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities lug for temporary fixing Port 4 Figure 72 DN0932994 Port 5 ETHCON trace adapter Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 81 .

g NOTE For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only. X10.X8 are used for connection of external alarm sensors. 8.. At the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be connected up to 8 different electrical consumers (e..5. 4.  8 8   8   8    8    8     8 8 ACTM terminal numbering Pin no.X4 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . All cables will be attached to the stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.#20 AWG). relays).g.. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a crosssection in the range between 0. The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48 external alarm sensors. The following tables give information on the wiring of the terminals.1 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Connection of external alarm sensors Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection Terminal for Base rack (ACTM). 12 GND GND GND GND 1 AL42P AL36P AL30P AL24P 3 AL43P AL37P AL31P AL25P 5 AL44P AL38P AL32P AL26P 7 AL45P AL39P AL33P AL27P 9 AL46P AL40P AL34P AL28P Table 19 82  8 8 Figure 73     Pin assignments ACTM connector X1. The spring terminals are labelled X1 .10. 6. the terminal blocks X1...External cabling activities 3.5 mm2 (#28 .5 3. Signal name X1 Signal name X2 Signal name X3 Signal name X4 2. Remove the outer insulation as shown in Figure 63 for proper ground contact of the cable screen to the stress relieving bracket..08 mm2 and 0.

Signal name X5 Signal name X6 Signal name X7 Signal name X8 2..) Pin no. It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs. g NOTE The switched current must not exceed 100 mAAC/DC (contact closed) and the maximum switched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open).. relays with default contact open). 8.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pin no.g. The resistance of the contacts in closed position must be lower than 100 Ohm. X10 Signal name 1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P 2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M 3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P 4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M Table 21 DN0932994 Signal name Pin assignments ACTM connector X9. 6. The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of the MK:OPEXAL which protects the ACTM against over-voltage.. 4. Pin no.X8 clamping blocks must be a switching contact. 12 GND GND GND GND 1 AL0P AL6P AL12P AL18P 3 AL1P AL7P AL13P AL19P 5 AL2P AL8P AL14P AL20P 7 AL3P AL9P AL15P AL21P 9 AL4P AL10P AL16P AL22P 11 AL5P AL11P AL17P AL23P Table 20 g External cabling activities Pin assignments ACTM connector X5.X8 NOTE The signal source of the command outputs on the X1.10. X9 Pin no. 11 Table 19 Signal name X1 Signal name X2 Signal name X3 Signal name X4 AL47P AL41P AL35P AL29P Pin assignments ACTM connector X1. X10 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 83 .X4 (Cont.. The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to connect up to 8 relay contacts (e. The maximum switching power is 10 W...

The spring terminals are labelled X1 . X4. X10 (Cont. 12 GND GND GND GND 1 AL18P AL12P AL6P AL0P Table 22 84 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1. All cables will be fixed to the copper bracket of the module for strain relief and grounding of the cable screen with cable ties. 4. X9 Pin no.X4 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .2 Signal name Pin assignments ACTM connector X9.. Signal name X1 Signal name X2 Signal name X3 Signal name X4 2.5 mm2 (#28 . g NOTE For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pin no. 8. X10 Signal name 5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P 6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M 7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P 8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M Table 21 3.#20 AWG).10.5.. Pin no..08 mm2 and 0. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a crosssection in the range between 0. 6.  STRESSRELEAVINGBRACKET  Figure 74 8 8     8 8   Terminal numbering of the ACTM24 The following table gives information on the pin aasignment of the terminals. Remove the outer insulation for proper ground contact of the cable screen to the stress relieving bracket. The ACTM24 provides 4 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 24 external alarm sensors..) Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24 The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection Terminal for Base rack ACTM24.

Signal name X1 Signal name X2 Signal name X3 Signal name X4 3 AL19P AL13P AL7P AL1P 5 AL20P AL14P AL8P AL2P 7 AL21P AL15P AL9P AL3P 9 AL22P AL16P AL10P AL4P 11 AL23P AL17P AL11P AL5P Table 22 g External cabling activities Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1. The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of the MK:OPEXAL.. If external alarm sensors are placed outside the building.X4 (Cont. Each MK:OPEXAL protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTM or ACTM24 against over-voltage.6 Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL The switched current must not exceed 100 mAAC/DC (contact closed) and the maximum switched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open).Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pin no. that protects the ACTM24 against over-voltage. the MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) is required. Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance to the following figures. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 85 .. g NOTE 3. The maximum switching power is 10 W.) NOTE It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs. The alarm source has to be a open/close contact like a relais contact or switch.

External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB screw. 86 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . – Connect the cables coming from the external alarm sensors at the left screw terminals of the overvoltage protectors. – Attach the MK:OPEXAL to the wall in vertical position and fix it with screws and washers. – Fix all cables with cable ties at the bracket of the MK:OPEXAL – Route the cables to the ACTM and the ground wire to the PE-plate of the EMI-panel (see Figure 78). dowel and washers 6 mm (for indoor applications only) ground terminal ground wire OPEXAL cable ties for indoor applications only Figure 75 10 symmetric pair cables Contents of the MK:OPEXAL – Drill two holes with 6 mm in diameter and min. – Attach the ground wire to the yellow / green clamping terminal (see Figure 77). 35 mm depth as shown in Figure 76. – Insert the dowels. – Connect the symmetric pair cables at the right screw terminals of the overvoltage protectors.

18" from the rack edge 8.66" 700mm max.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities diameter 6 mm drill hole depth 35 mm 27. 30 mm / 1.66" 220 mm Figure 76 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL cables from external alarm sensors Input side ground wire to PE-plate of EMI panel Figure 77 DN0932994 Output side symmetric pair cables to ACTM Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 87 .

– Connect the external alarm cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM. 88 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB cable tie ACTM PE-plate ground bolt stress relieving bracket Figure 78 Routing of external alarm cables – Fix external alarm cables with cables ties at the stress relieving bracket. so that a proper electrical contact between the bracket and the cable screens is guaranteed. – Attach the ground wire to the bolt at the PE-plate.

OPEXAL10V1 ground terminal module1 module0 to ACTM SubD 25 optional mounting bar (MK:OPEXALBV1) from external alarm sensors ground wire to PE-plate Figure 79 Assembly guideline Fix the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the wall is as described in section 3. X4 X3 X2 X1 from module 1 from module 0 Figure 80 DN0932994 cables from OPEXAL10V1 S30864-X210-A105 S30864-X210-A105 ACTM. connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 89 . To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps: 1. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1 module no. 6. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar. 4. 2. 3. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25 female connector of the OPEXAL10V1. 5. X2 to connect the (optional) module 1. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.7 External cabling activities Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1 Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the building. 0 and X1.6. the MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) that protects up to 10 alarm lines is required. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables ties. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base rack.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 3. so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.

External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Quad 1 2 3 4 5 6 Binder Tape Color blue orange green brown grey black red Table 23 90 Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin white/blue 1 white/orange 2 blue 3 orange 4 white/blue 5 white/orange 6 blue 7 orange 8 white/blue 9 white/orange 10 blue 11 orange 12 white/blue 1 white/orange 2 blue 3 orange 4 white/blue 5 white/orange 6 blue 7 orange 8 white/blue not used white/orange not used blue not used orange not used white/blue not used white/orange not used blue not used orange not used OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Quad
1

2

3

4

5

6

Binder Tape Color
blue

orange

green

brown

grey

black

red

Table 24

External cabling activities

Wire Color

Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin

white/blue

1

white/orange

2

blue

3

orange

4

white/blue

5

white/orange

6

blue

7

orange

8

white/blue

9

white/orange

10

blue

11

orange

12

white/blue

1

white/orange

2

blue

3

orange

4

white/blue

5

white/orange

6

blue

7

orange

8

white/blue

not used

white/orange

not used

blue

not used

orange

not used

white/blue

not used

white/orange

not used

blue

not used

orange

not used

OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM

The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,
mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Figure 81).
The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.

DN0932994

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

91

External cabling activities

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

ground pin

clamping block for connection
of external alarm sensor
s
Figure 81

Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1

The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at the
clamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wires
with a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The label of the module gives information about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.
In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.

valid alarm no. for module 0

AL37
AL25

AL38
AL26

AL39
AL27

AL40
AL28

AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M

AL36
AL24

valid alarm no. for module 1

AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M
AL_P
GND
AL_M

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

AL29
AL41
Figure 82

g

92

AL30
AL42

AL31
AL43

AL32
AL44

AL33
AL45

Label with terminal assignment

NOTE
Do not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel.

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

3.8

External cabling activities

External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP)
If external alarm sensors are placed inside the building and the alarm lines more than
30 m long, the External Alarm Protection (EAP) has to be used.
The EAP module will be mounted on the EMI-panel of the rack as shown in Figure 83.
A mounting bracket (2) is provided for the fixing the module. In addition the mounting kit
MK:HPDURV3 (1) is needed to mount the bracket.
Two prefabricated cables (4, 5) will be used for the connections between the EAP (3)
and the ACTM. Both cables are equipped with a SubD 37 female connector at the end
that will be connected at the EAP module and deisolated wire pairs for the connection
at the spring terminals of the ACTM.
One cable is used for transmission of the external alarms, the other one for transmission
of commands.
Two cables (6, 7) with 20 wire pairs each is needed for the connection between the EAP
module and the site specific alarm distribution panel.
These cables must be prepared on site. The end of each cable that should be connected
at the EAP has to be equipped with a SubD-37 female connector.
The pinning of the SubD-D37 connectors of the prefabricated cables and the color code
of the wire pairs is given in the following tables.
ground bolts

CAN IN

CAN OUT Serial IF

OVPT1

OVPT0

-48 V

CAN TEST LPA
MSU
PE-bolts

2
3
6
7

ACTM
Ext.1 CU 4...7

4

5

Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7

Ext.2 CU 0...3

4

5

1

Figure 83

DN0932994

Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

93

External cabling activities

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Pair No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Table 25

94

Color

Pin No.

white

1

blue

2

white

3

orange

4

white

5

green

6

white

7

brown

8

white

9

grey

10

red

11

blue

12

red

13

orange

14

red

15

green

16

red

17

brown

18

Pair No.
10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Color

Pin No.

red

19

grey

20

black

21

blue

22

black

23

orange

24

black

25

green

26

black

27

brown

28

black

29

grey

30

yellow

31

blue

32

yellow

33

orange

34

yellow

35

green

36

Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female)

Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pair No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Color white 8 9 Table 26 DN0932994 Block/Terminal X 10 1 blue 2 white 3 orange 4 white 5 green 6 white 7 brown 8 white X8 1 grey 2 red 3 blue 7 External cabling activities X8 Pair No. 10 5 orange 6 red 7 green 8 red 9 brown 10 red Block/Terminal X8 grey 11 12 13 14 15 4 red Color black 17 18 12 X4 1 blue 2 black 3 orange 4 black 5 green 6 black 7 brown 8 black 9 grey 16 11 X4 10 yellow 11 blue 12 yellow X3 1 orange 2 yellow 3 green 4 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 95 .

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 black X6 1 blue X6 2 black 3 orange 4 black 5 green 6 black 7 brown 8 black 9 grey 10 yellow 11 blue 12 yellow X7 1 orange 2 yellow 3 green 4 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Pair No. 1 2 Color white 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 27 96 X9 1 blue 2 white 3 orange 3 Block/Terminal X9 5 green 6 white 7 brown 8 X5 10 1 grey 2 red 3 blue 4 red 5 orange 6 red 7 green 8 red 9 brown 10 Color red Block/Terminal X5 grey 11 4 white white Pair No.

DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 97 .9 External cabling activities Alarm collection terminal ACTC . X17 X18 X19 X28 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 X37 X34 X35 X36 Figure 84 X1 X2 24 X26 1 X38 X39 X40 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240) The following tables provides information about the connecting of internal alarm sensors at the ACTC. microwave equipment and smoke sensor. HX heat exchangers.. temperature sensor..internal alarms / DC supply The ACTC is used as a connection board to support single connectors for the internal alarms (FAN.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 3. heat exchanger.) and the DC supply for the FANs. rack in service. The ACTC is located in the DC panel of each rack (see Figure 84).

External cabling activities AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack Rack 0. X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active) 14 Front side X26 / 3. 1. 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active) 12 4) Front side X38.36. X26 / 5. X26 / 11. X26 / 9. 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) 15 Front side X28. X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5 General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 28 98 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL) Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . 2 Rack 3. X39... 2 (all connected in parallel) Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) Notes: 1) “High Active” if OVP is installed 2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side 3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side 4) connectors X38. 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) 10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) 11 3) Front side X37.12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active) 8 2) Front side X18..10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active) 9 Front side X19. X26 / 7..7 0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active) 1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active) 2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active) 3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active) 4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) 5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active) 6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active) 7 2) Front side X17. X26 / 1.

7 0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active) 1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active) 2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active) 3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active) 4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) 5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active) 6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active) 5 Rear side X43 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (not installed) (High Active) 6 Rear side X44 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (not installed) (High Active) 9 3) Front side X17-X19. X26 / 1. X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5 General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 29 DN0932994 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 99 . 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) 10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) 11 3) Front side X37.. 2 (all connected in parallel) Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) 1) “High Active” if OVP is installed 2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side 3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side 4) connectors X38. 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) 15 Front side X28.X36.. 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active) 12 4) Front side X38. X26 / 5. X40. X42 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active) 14 Front side X26 / 3.. X39. 1. X26 / 7.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities X17 X18 X19 X28 X29 X30 24 X31 X32 X33 X37 X34 X35 X36 Figure 85 AL X26 X1 X2 1 X38 X39 X40 X42 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack Rack 0. 2 Rack 3..

2 Rack 3.External cabling activities 3. Front side X45 / 17.and Extension rack. 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active) 7 2) Rear side X43. Front side X45 / 21.10 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 . X45 / 9. Front side X45 / 23.internal alarms / DC supply The ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.7 0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active) 1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active) 2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active) 3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active) 4 2) Rear side X23. 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active) 6 2) Rear side X25.. 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active) 8 2) Front side X45 / 15. AD-panel of Service1A rack and in the LEpanel of the Service2 rack. 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 13 2) Rear side X41. 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) 1) “High Active” if OVP is installed 2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side 3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 30 100 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) 11 3) Front side X37. Front side X45 / 5. 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) 10 Front side X45 / 11. 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active) 9 Front side X45 / 13. 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) 15 Front side X45 / 1. 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active) 12 Front side X45 / 7.. 1. Front side X45 / 19. The board is located in the DC panel of Base. 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) 5 2) Rear side X24. 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active) 14 Front side X45 / 3. X37 X48 X20 Figure 86 AL X45 1 24 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3 Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack Rack 0.

7 0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active) 1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active) 2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active) 3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active) 4 2) Rear side X23. 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) 1) “High Active” if OVP is installed 2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side 3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 31 DN0932994 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 101 . 2 Rack 3. Front side X45 / 21. Front side X45 / 15. 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) 15 Front side X45 / 1.16 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (High Active) 9 Front side X45 / 13.. Front side X45 / 19. 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) 11 3) Front side X37. 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active) 14 Front side X45 / 3.. X45 / 9. Front side X45 / 23. 1. Front side X45 / 5. 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) 5 2) Rear side X24. 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) 10 Front side X45 / 11. Front side X45 / 17. 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 13 2) Rear side X41. 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active) 6 2) Rear side X25. 18 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (High Active) 8 2) Rear side X44. 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active) 12 Front side X45 / 7.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack External cabling activities Service1A / Service2 Rack Rack 0. 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active) 7 2) Rear side X43.

11 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 . AD-panel of each Service1A rack and at the LE-panel of Service2 rack. LMU SMOKE RDO X1 X2 X3 Figure 87 24 1 X4 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors at the ACTC-4 for BS-240 II. 102 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .and Extension racks.internal alarms / DC supply The ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-24o II and BS-240XL II racks and is located at the DC panel of the Base.External cabling activities 3.

18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active) 8 2) Top of PCB X10.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB AL Connector / Pin on ACTC External cabling activities Base / Extension Service1A / Service2 Rack 0.. Front side X4 / 15.. Front side X4 / 3.08 mm2.. 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet. Front side X4 / 7. Front side X4 / 9. 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active) 9 4) Top of PCB X26. Front side X4 / 19. 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active) (if not installed ENVA10) 6 2) Top of PCB X11. 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB) 5) 1) “High Active” if OVP is installed. 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6) (MAJ) 5) 13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP.. General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 32 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameter range of 0. Front side X4 / 17. 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) (MBR) 5) 10 4) Top of PCB X26. 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) (if not installed ENVA9) 5 2) Top of PCB X15.. 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link to AC7DC. 0. 2 Rack 3. Rack 7 0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active) 1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active) 2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active) 3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active) 4 2) Top of PCB X12. if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected). Front side X4 / 11. 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) (BBR) 5) 11 3) Front side X2. 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front.5 mm2 DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 103 . Front side X4 / 1.6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High / low Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active) 14 4) Top of PCB X26. 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated connector at top of ACTC-PCB. 1. 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active) (if not installed ENVA11) 7 2) Top of PCB X14. Front side X4 / 21. . 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active) Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active) 12 4) Top of PCB X26. Front side X4/ 23. 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF) 5) 15 4) Top of PCB X26. 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not available. Front side X4/ 5. Front side X4 / 13.

internal alarms / DC supply The ACTC-5 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks and is located at the DC panel of the Base. 20 --. AL Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension Rack 0. maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F. the maximum "Alarm Low"resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm. 1. LMU SMOKE RDO X1 X2 X3 Figure 88 24 1 X4 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors at the ACTC-5 for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB. Front side X4/ 23. 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) 9 Front side X4 / 13. 3. 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Table 33 104 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . 24 FAN3 (High Active) 5 7) Front side X4 / 21.(High Active) 6 7) Front side X4 / 19. 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) 10 Front side X4 / 11. 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) 8 Front side X4 / 15. 22 --.and Extension racks.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-5 . 2 0 Front side X3/RDO RDO (High Active) 1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) 2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) 3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) 4 2) Top of PCB X12. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from external to internal signal ground.External cabling activities g Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB NOTE It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected to the ACTC-3.(High Active) 7 Front side X4 / 17.

4 Enva7 (High / low Active) 15 Top of PCB X26. 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) 13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP.13 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface A SubD 15 female connector and the RJ45 socket.5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet. Front side X4 / 1. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from external to internal signal ground. Signal Name Pin No. Front side X4 / 3. 3. located at the DC panel of the Base rack.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB AL External cabling activities Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension 11 3) Front side X2.7) alarms for former FAN4 and FAN5. Low active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax Table 33 g ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks (Cont. Pin No. 2 Signal name 10BT_TD- Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 105 . Front side X4/ 5. maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F. 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front. 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) 8) (High / low Active) 12 Front side X4 / 7. cannot used as Enva alarms because not SW supported 8) High active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed. Signal name Pin assignments of the LMT interface RJ45 Pin No.6 Enva6 )(High / low Active) 14 Top of PCB X26. is the interface for connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for commissioning and maintenance purposes. 1 --- 6 LMT_SA 11 LMT_RB 2 LMT_TA 7 --- 12 LMT_IB 3 LMT_CA 8 GND 13 LMT_SB 4 LMT_RA 9 GND 14 --- 5 LMT_IA 10 LMT_TB 15 --- Table 34 Table 35 DN0932994 Pin No.) NOTE It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected to the ACTC-3. the maximum "Alarm Low"resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm. Front side X4 / 9. 1 Signal name Signal Name 10BT_TD+ RJ45 Pin No. 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated connector at top of ACTC-PCB.

Signal name 3 10BT_RD+ 4 --- 5 --- 6 10BT_RD- 7 --- 8 --- Table 35 106 Signal Name Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface (Cont.) Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB RJ45 Pin No. RJ45 Pin No.

is 0. The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0° or more is defined as cell 0 or sector 0. With regard to the overvoltage protection. 0° sector 2 sector angle directional antenna beam centre line pole sector width 120° N sector 0 sector 1 Figure 89 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) For detailed antenna configuration. The antenna configuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.14. 3. which hardware is connected to which cell. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc. In case of omni cell the cell no. starts at an azimuth angle of 0° (north) and rotates clockwise. For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the corresponding customer documents. For installation and service purposes it is useful to know. diameter 1/2” have to be used for connections between the antenna cables and the front connectors of the combining modules. The numbering. because the thick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the racks. refer to the site-specific documentation.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables Short jumper cables with a max. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 107 . seen from the top of the antenna pole.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 3. it is recommended to ground the outer conductor of antenna feeder cables where they are connected with the jumper cables outside the BTSE.14 External cabling activities Antenna connections The BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas.

External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB These jumper cables must be fabricated of 1/2” highly flexible coaxial cable on-site. 108 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures. if no pre-fabricated cables should be used. Figure 90 Tools for jumper fabrication heat shrink sleeve fitting ring heat protection tape cleaning tissue corrugation nut connector head emery paper Figure 91 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) – Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the front connectors of the combining modules.

Do not deform cable outer conductor.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities – Cut the cable to the required length. by using too much pressure during the cutting process! 2 rotate clockwis e 1 Figure 92 Using the trimming tool Figure 93 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor heat shrink sleeve fitting ring Figure 94 DN0932994 Removal of metal particles Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 109 .

External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB fitting ring connector head corrugation nut Figure 95 Assembly of the connector unit 20 mm Figure 96 Fixing of connector unit. removal of outer insulation heat protection tape heat shrink sleeve Figure 97 110 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .

N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight".00 Nm.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities hot air stream remove extra length of heat protection tape Figure 98 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape The jumper cables must be routed through the cable feeding module forward to the 7/16” front connectors of DUAMCO/FICOM/MDUX and to N-type male connector of DIAMCO. 1/2” jumper cable Max. 20 mm for proper contact with the metal lids of the cable feeding module (see Figure 102).8”/45 mm width across flats 32 Figure 99 max. – For grounding remove outer insulation approx. max. There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail. dimensions of the antenna connectors Connect the antenna cables to the combining equipment as follows: – Unscrew the front part of the cable feeding module. which has to be connected. g NOTE Fix the jumper cables at 7/16 connectors with a torque wrench set to 25 Nm. Connector suppliers recommends a torque of approx. g NOTE Note that being able to close the doors means that the depth of the right angle connector is not allowed to exceed 45 mm. 1. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 111 . 1. – Route the antenna jumpers to the rack.

– Screw the front part of the cable feeding module in its original position. – Fix the jumpers at the connectors TX/RX of combiners. Figure 100 Opening of the cable feeding module Figure 101 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module 112 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB – Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors of antenna combiners. – Bend the jumpers into the correct position for easy closing of cable feeding module.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities Figure 102 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 113 .

114 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 .15 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Installation of TMA or MHA Tower mounted amplifiers and mast head amplifiers are used to reach a BTS sensitivity better than GSM requirements at the antenna connector and to compensate a high antenna cable loss. only one feeder cable is needed between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplex architecture of the TMA / MHA. The TMA/ MHA should placed as close to the antenna as possible.The configuration is shown in figure below and the installation in Figure 105. It will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is connected to.External cabling activities 3. a DUBIAS is required for powering and signalling of the TMA. TMA TMA Base Rack DIAMCO CU FICOM Figure 104 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) If a TMA used together with HPDU. When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner inside the rack. the TMA is used in conjunction with a DIAMCO and it only amplifies the overall BTS uplink signal. TMA TMA Base Rack DUAMCO CU Figure 103 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used) If a FICOM as antenna combiner inside the rack.

Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cable. – Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the antenna feeder cable and the antenna. – While still on ground. located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (lettered ANT and BTS) are the interfaces for connection of the 1/2” antenna jumper cables that connect the TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS. – Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire at nearest grounding facility at the mast or pole. DUBIAS and TMA to TMA BIAS DIAMCO PATH RXIN HPDU2 ANT0 ANT1 RXOUT From FICOM DIAMCO Figure 106 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS 3. The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Figure 108. The ground wires eyes must have the right size for the TMA‘s M8 ground screw and the cable should be have a cross section not less than 16 mm2. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 115 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB TMA External cabling activities TMA RX8 DIAMCO RX2 RX1 CU8 DUBIAS HPDU FICOM CU2 CU1 Figure 105 Configuration with HPDU.15. but leave the brackets open. – Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws. join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8. The location of the external interfaces is shown in Figure 107. The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.1 Installation of the TMADV1 Two 7/16 female connectors.

Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cable. however. 116 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . Figure 108 TMA with mounting brackets The TMADV1 may be also mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws (not supplied with the TMADV1) The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The best method can only be decided by the installer. it may be insulated. Please note. if the fixing material will be used as shown in the following figure. that the max. that the wall itself does probably not provide adequate grounding. diameter of the mast do not exceed 140 mm.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB AN T (input/output towards TX/RX antenna) BT S (input/output towards BTS) grounding point Figure 107 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA) g NOTE Note. f WARNING It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to the TMA‘s grounding point. The proper way of mounting the TMA on a wall varies from case to case.

the uplink signal coming from the same TX/RX antenna. so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards. with low noise figure. Various versions for different frequency bands of the DTMA and DTMARET are available. on cable runways) possible.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 3.g.15.2 External cabling activities Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx The Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers (DTMAx) are the RF units that provide the means to feed the downlink signal to one TX/RX antenna and to amplify. Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r Figure 109 Example of STMAx and DTMAx Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r Figure 110 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example) g NOTE It is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical position. It will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to.. it depends on the environmental conditions. In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e. The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with the BTSE (lettered COM) and the antenna (lettered ANT). DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 117 .

3. The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded hole for connection of the grounding wire. The torque must be 25 . The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dowels (not supplied with the device). the following steps can generally be recommended: 1. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully. therefore a grounding wire has to be prepared for each device on site. 4. 2. This is the situation just before tightening the hose clips. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2” jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable (connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). 118 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . but do not over-tighten (see Figure 111). 5.External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Each DTMAx / STMAx shall be grounded to the pole. 8. The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded point on the pole.30 Nm. Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the mounting plate (see rear view of the devices). Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less than 16 mm2. Remove the tensioning belt. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is recommended. Tighten the connection to a torque of 5 Nm. The grounding wire cable lug must have the right size for the M8 ground screw. hose clips tighten tighten Figure 111 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx For the mounting. 6. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole. 7.

on cable runways) possible.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. Pay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables. however. The cross section of the ground wires should be not less than 16 mm2. it may be insulated.3 Installation of the MHA The mast head amplifier MHA should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. it depends on the environmental conditions. In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e. It will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to. that the wall itself probably does not provide adequate grounding. The best method can only be decided by the installer. MHA type MDTA 850 MHz MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz MDDA 1800 MHz MDPA 1900 MHz Table 37 DN0932994 frequency band outer dimension in mm (HxWxD) 350 x 210 x 100 295 x 210 x 65 Types of the MHA Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 119 . Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights.. The proper way of mounting the device on a wall varies from case to case. so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards. Do not work without fall protection equipment. Please note. g NOTE g NOTE f WARNING! It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to the STMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point.15. Various versions for different frequency bands of the MHA are available. 3.g. BTS type BS-24x / BS-4x with MFDUAMCO or FICOM6 Table 36 g MHA type frequency band MDTA 850 MHz MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz MDDA 1800 MHz MDPA 1900 MHz Types of the MHA NOTE It is recommended to mount the MHA at pole or wall in a vertical position.

8.30 Nm. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt. 120 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential DN0932994 . 7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. but do not over-tighten. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole. Remove the tensioning belt. The unit provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with the BTSE (lettered BTS1 / BTS2) and the antenna (lettered ANT1 / ANT2). Place the unit in its final mounting position at wall and mark the 4 drilling points. The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded hole for connection of the grounding wire. 1. Drill the holes with a twisted widia drill (d=8 mm) to a depth of 50 mm. Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1 and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and ANT2). In this case proceed as follows: 1. 6. 3. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is recommended. The grounding wire cable lug must have the right size for the M8 ground screw. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole. Tighten the connection to a torque of 5 Nm. 5. The torque must be 25 .External cabling activities Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB The MHA can be mounted with hose band clips at poles or at the wall with screws and dowels. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less than 16 mm2. 4. it is recommended to perform the following: Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the mounting plate. 2. In case of pole mounting. 2. hose clips tighten tighten Figure 112 Example of pole mounting The may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dowels (not supplied with the device).

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB External cabling activities 3. 4. Do not work without fall protection equipment. Tighten the connection to a torque of 5 Nm.30 Nm. DN0932994 Id:0900d805807bc8d9 Confidential 121 . Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1 and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and ANT2). The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is recommended. 5. The torque must be 25 . 6. Insert the dowels and fix the MHA with 4 screws M8. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. f WARNING! Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights.

an interconnection hole in upper area of the side walls of each rack is provided.g. 122 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . pre-installed by the manufacturer in accordance with customer configuration: – Sub-rack. – BS-240 / 240XL: Setup the 8 sealing stripes (1) at the edges of the holes of both adjoined racks. The CAN-Bus cables and the SELIC-Bus cables will be routed above the EMI panels. CAN-BUS) – Link equipment For cable routing from one rack into another one two ways can be used.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4 Rack completion The racks are shipped including equipment components. The two mounting kits EMC as shown in the following figure contain all of the parts that are needed for connection of two racks. DC-cabling. DC power supply. battery cabling. Push the 4 contact springs (2) over the adjacent edges of both racks. – BS-240 II / 240XL II: Move at first the adjoining racks close together. The holes are covered by plates for single racks and the end-racks of a row. which holds several boards and modules – DC panel – Backplanes (multi-layer PC-boards. MK:EMCRV1 (BS-240 / 240XL) MK:EMCR-2V1 (BS-240 II / 240XL II) 4 4 2 1 3 3 1) sealing stripes 2) Contact springs Figure 113 Contents of the connection kits Mount the parts of the connection kits in the following order: – Loosen the security screws M3 of the cover part (Figure 114) or break out the preperforated part of the appropriate side panel (Figure 115). battery cables).g. which are mounted at the rear side of the subrack) and internal cabling – Heaters and fan units – Core modules and carrier related modules – AC/DC converters – Semi-rigid cables for setup of the system cabling The following items are planned for installation after setup of the racks on site: – Backup batteries – Cabling between the racks (e. Without leaving the EMC-protected area (e. Move the racks close together.

unscrew the 10 screws M3 1 Figure 114 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL) 2 2 Figure 115 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) 4 3 Figure 116 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240) DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 123 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion – Connect the racks to one common unit with nut and screw M8x20 (3) and install the ground wire (4) between the ground bolts of both racks (Figure 116).

S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with with an interconnection hole in the side panels. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS1202V6.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB g 124 NOTE The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. that cable connections between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible. serial no. From this follows.

1 Rack completion Preparation of the top cover Before starting the connection of external cables. The required number of pieces can be removed in easy manner by breaking out at the perforation. It will be delivered in 100 cm sections and must be cutted in the required length. Figure 117 Paint retouch of the top cover sealing profile tape Figure 118 Placement of the sealing profile tapes The EMI-panel of the BS-240 (IIB) and BS-240XL (IIB) racks are covered with the top cover MK:ROOF-2BV1. For this purpose the top cover provides removable pieces as shown in the figure below. The sharp edges of the break-outs will be covered with the sealing profile tape (Siemens Serial No. The required number of pieces has to be cracked out with a side cutter or a metal saw: The breaking points have to be deburred. C42127-Z1-C661). to avoid injuries during the cable installation.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. A500-C101-B261). DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 125 . After that refinish the paint coat at all cracks with the paint retouch kit (Siemens Serial No. It provides at all side3 panels removable pieces for cable routing. prepare the top cover for later routing the cables through the cover to the infrastructure equipment on site.

Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB FRONTSIDE REARSIDE REMOVABLEPIECES FORINTER RACKCABLING REMOVABLEPIECES FOREXTERNALCABLES Figure 119 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1 126 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .

which can be installed in the racks of BS-240 II and BS-240XL II. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of batteries. 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah Table 38 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) Table 39 shows the battery types. Each battery set consist of 4 batteries. 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah Oerlikon. Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity EnerSys. they can be delivered without backup batteries. 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah Oerlikon. The following battery types can be installed in the first generation of BS-240 / 240XL. 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah Table 39 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) The charging mode of the battery system has to be selected dependend on the installed battery type. Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity Excide. A400/85 BATTPACKV1 MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah Oerlikon. battery type Sonnenschein A400/85 select “Sonnenschein” Oerlicon CP100 select “Oerlicon” Oerlicon CP 80 select “Oerlicon” Oerlicon 12C@2000 select “Power Safe” Oerlicon CP70 select “Power Safe” Hawker 12V92F select “Power Safe” Table 40 g DN0932994 charging mode to be selected Battery charging modes NOTE The battery type Oerlicon 12C@2000 and 12CP70 comply to Hawker/Power Safecharging mode and not to charging mode of Oerlicon (CP80 & CP10). If a label relevant to the characteristics of the batteries is delivered. The installed battery type depends on the required backup time. then should be this label placed on the door of the rack. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 127 . Therefore the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) with an appropriate software load has to be connected with the RS 232 interface of the DCBCCTRL.2 Rack completion Overview of battery sets To enable easier transportation and setup of Service Racks. 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah Oerlikon. The following table gives information about the correct selection.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. 12CP100/19” BATTPACKV3 MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah EnerSys.

S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are installed on site. no Service1 or Service1A rack is used. installed in Service2 racks have to be connected to the DC supply equipment. BS-240 / 240 XL: As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 rack. For detailed information refer to ITMN:BTSE. An identification of the AC/DC controllers is needed. the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and the front edge of the battery tray. Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID. The following combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = “ON/ON” or “OFF/OFF”. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS1202V6. They will be fixed at the batteries as shown in the figure below. 1 2 Figure 120 Parts for battery fixing 128 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . If the Service1A / Service2 racks are equipped with battery trays MK:BATTFIXCB.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. The battery sets. provided by the customer. before setup of the batteries. The first AC/DC frame is installed in the upper position. Slot ID bit 0 upper frame (AC/DC 1) ON OFF lower frame (AC/DC 2). serial no. if installed OFF ON Table 41 g Slot ID bit 1 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL) NOTE In a BS-240XL / XL II Service2 rack the extra space must not be used for a fourth set of batteries. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distance of 10 mm between the batteries.3 Installation of backup batteries in service rack g NOTE g NOTE If the rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. The capacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch rows of the AC/DC controller.

MK:BATTERY fixing plate loosen the screws Figure 122 Preparation of the battery tray g DN0932994 NOTE Whenever an AC-supplied BTS version in non-operational state is disconnected from external power supply. – Mount the battery fixing plates at the bottom section of the battery tray. the BTSinternal battery system must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery circuit breaker:BR33 (AD panel. A second variant of the battery tray will be equipped with fixing plates to provide space between the batteries.e. before setup of the battery set. Service1 cabinet) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 129 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion bracket spacer strips Figure 121 Placement of the spacer strips The bracket that fix the batteries inside the battery tray has to be removed. i. during storage/transport or service & maintenance. Proceed in accordance with the following figure: – Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray before fitting of the batteries.

Close and tighten both velcro straps.terminal) – Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.3. – Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (. – Turn up the protection cap to the end position. battery2 air vent tube s battery 1 battery3 battery 4 velcro straps Figure 123 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide” 130 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal). – Connect the short cable with battery 2 (.1 Installation of backup batteries type “Excide” Install and connect the backup batteries “Excide” (formerly “Sonnenschein”) in accordance with Figure 123 and Figure 124 in the following steps: – Switch OFF the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL .Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. f WARNING! Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to avoid accidental short circuits. during fasten the cables to the battery terminals (avoid contact of metal).terminal) and the black load-cable and the tempresistorcable to battery 1 (+ terminal).terminal) at battery 4 (+ terminal).terminal) and the long cable coming from battery3 (. – Fasten the battery nuts to a torque of 20 Nm. – Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray. – Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (. – Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (.Service1) and at mounting kit battery (Service2). – Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion tempresistor cable (color as shown not relevant) . The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.48 V (blue) + 0 V (black) + + 2 3 1 4 + + air vent tube. Equip the other end of the tube with the outlet nipple (7). Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 131 . routed via RF cable entry outside the rack Figure 124 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” Setup the battery air vent system in accordance with the figure in steps as follows: – – – – – – – – – – Setup a plastic angle (1) at the air outlet of each battery. Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards to the cable feeding module. g DN0932994 NOTE In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas. The second T-connector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a second battery tray. without any loops in vertical direction. Use the short plastic tube (5). please make sure to install the ventilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible. Connect the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-connector. Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-connector (3). Setup the connection between the T-connector and the cross-connector. Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle. Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-connector (4). The outlet part will be placed inside the cable feeding module.

Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 6 2 4 1 5 7 3 8 Figure 125 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 5 4 6  1 8 Figure 126 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide” 132 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .

Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to avoid accidental short circuits. during tighten the cables to the battery terminals (avoid contact of metal). – Connect the following batteries in the same way. – Put on the battery 1.terminal) and the black load-cable and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).terminal of battery 2 with the short metal bridge. – Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (. The battery capacity must be adjusted at the AC/DC (BS-240 / 240 XL) controller.Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).Service1) or of ADP (BS-240 II / 240 XL II . – Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the . setup the air vent system: – – – – – Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2 and 3. Connect the 4 tubes at the collector part (3). Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards through the cable feeding module. After all electrical connections are complete. g NOTE f WARNING! Turn up the protection cap to the end position. please make sure to install the ventilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 133 . Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1 and 4. – The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties. – Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque with 20 Nm. without any loops in vertical direction. g DN0932994 NOTE In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas.2. – Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque with 6 Nm.2 Rack completion Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon” For installation of an “Oerlicon” battery set proceed in accordance with Figure 127 and Figure 128 in steps as follows: – Switch off the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL .3. Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the collector part.3 and 4 into the battery tray.

Oerlicon) 2 3 4 1 Figure 128 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set 134 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Temp-resistor cabl e battery cable +0V battery cable -48 V 1 _ + 2 _ 3 4 _ + + _ + air vent system Figure 127 Connection of backup batteries (Co.

terminal) with the short metal bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm. – Shift the protection caps of both battery cables to the end position to covering of the battery poles.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.Service1) or at the AD-panel (BS-240 II/240 XL II .Service1A). – Connect the blue load cable to battery 1 (. – Fasten the accompanying protecting caps over the battery terminals. fasten the battery cable nuts.3.terminal) and connect the black load cable and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal). – Remove the protection cover of the MK:BATTERY.3 Rack completion Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker” Before starting the installation of the battery sets switch “OFF” the circuit breaker at the frame AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL . – Connect the following batteries in the same way.3 and 4 into the battery tray. – Using a wrench set to a torque of 5 Nm. bracket 1 2 3 4 _ + Figure 130 Placement and connection of the batteries DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 135 . – Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original position. switch OFF Figure 129 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 Install and connect the “EnerSys” batteries (formerly “Hawker”) according to Figure 130 and Figure 134 as well as the following steps: – Place batteries 1. – Connect the battery 1 (+ terminal) and battery 2 (.2.

Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB “+” pole cable to MK:BATTERY tempresistor cable distance piece metal bridge battery 4 Figure 131 Detail of the connection of battery 4 f WARNING! Use only insulated tools to connect the cables to the battery nuts to avoid accidental short circuits! After all of the electrical connections are complete.00 m plastic tube and 3 T-collectors. install the air vent system of the battery set. It consist of 2. The plastic tube has to be cutted into pieces with the length as shown in Figure 132: 136 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .

Connect the a T-collector part (3) at the tubes of battery 2.3 and 4.3 and 4. Fix the plastic tube (2) at the air vent connector of battery 1. Connect the T-collectors of battery 2 . Connect the pre-installed plastic tube that is routed to the gas outlet of the rack at the T-collector of battery 4.3 and 3 .4 with the 100 mm tubes (4). Attach tube (2) of battery 1 to the T-collector of battery 2. Figure 133 Routing of the air vent tubes DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 137 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion 3 70 mm 1 4 100 mm 2 170 mm Figure 132 Parts of the air vent system – – – – – – Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) to the air vent connectors of batteries 2. Fix the tube at the rack frame with cable ties.

battery cable connection 138 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . + + _ _ Figure 134 Connection between the batteries.Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the figure below. The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the “+” pole and the“-” pole of the MK:BATTERY.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.

serial no. battery cable no. battery system BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 Table 43 DN0932994 battery cable no. battery system BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 BAT 3 Table 42 g from to length color 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/. dependent on the BS-240 / 240XL or BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types and configurations. connect BAT0 with F:AC/DC1 and BAT1 with F:AC/DC2. g 4.4.(-48V) 1750 mm blue 111/1 S1-AC/DC1-19b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1750 mm black 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-22b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 3300 mm blue 111/2 S1-AC/DC1-21b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 3300 mm black 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 4200 mm blue 111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 4200 mm black List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 139 .(-48V) 1500 mm blue 111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1500 mm black 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 2850 mm blue 111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 2850 mm black 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 3700 mm blue 111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 3700 mm black 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4200 mm blue 111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4200 mm black List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) NOTE Note: If the Service1 rack is equipped with two frames AC/DC (1 and 2) and only BAT0 and BAT1 should be connected to the AC/DC frames. that cable connections between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible.1 NOTE The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. From this follows. Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL An overview of the battery interrack cabling for BS-240 and BS-240XL is provided in the tables below. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with an interconnection hole in the side panels.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. if these rack types will be used. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS1202V6.4 Rack completion Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration) This chapter provides information about the cable connections from one rack to another. from to length color 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-20b S1/BAT0/.

) battery system temp-resistor-cable no. from to length BAT 0 112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm BAT 1 112/2 S2/1 BAT1 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm BAT 2 112/3 S2/2 BAT2 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T0 5500 mm BAT 3 112/4 S2/3 BAT3 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T1 5500 mm Table 44 List of temp-resistor cables a a a a a a a a 25 26 27 28 T0 14 15 16 17 T0 b b b b b b b b T1 a b c 1 2 -48 V 0V terminal block battery frame + .+ BAT0 BAT1 terminal block AC/DC1 frame T1 + .+ BAT2 BAT3 terminal block AC/DC2 frame Figure 135 Terminal blocks for battery cables 140 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . BAT 3 Table 43 from to length color 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4700 mm blue 111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4700 mm black List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) (Cont.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB battery system battery cable no.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Service 2/3 Service 2/2 top cover air vent Rack completion Service1 Service2/1 air vent air vent air vent 112/2 110/2 111/2 temp-resistor cable 112/4 112/3 110/3 111/3 frame AC/DC 1 110/1 111/1 ϑ T1 112/1 T0 frame AC/DC 2 110/4 111/4 ϑ BAT3 ϑ ϑ ϑ ϑ BAT2 T1 T0 ϑ BAT1 BAT0 Figure 136 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 141 .

Rack completion

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4.4.2

Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
An overview of battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with the AD
panel variant ADPAV3 is shown in the following table.

Cable
No

From

To
*1)

Color

Length
m

Factory No.
S30861-*

blue

1,50

X215-A70

black

1,70

blue

1,50

black

1,70

blue

2,71

418 /1

S1/A:MK: Battery 1

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-)

418 /2

S1/A:MK: Battery 1

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+)

418 /1

S1/A:MK: Battery 3

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-)

418 /2

S1/A:MK: Battery 3

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+)

419 /1

S1/A:MK: Battery 1

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-)

419 /2

S1/A:MK: Battery 1

S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+)

black

2,71

422 /1

S2/1:MK: Battery 3

S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

blue

1,71

422 /2

S2/1:MK: Battery 3

S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

black

1,71

422 /1

S2/2:MK: Battery 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

blue

1,71

422 /2

S2/2:MK: Battery 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

black

1,71

422 /1

S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1/2: MK: Battery 3

blue

1,71

422 /2

S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1/2: MK: Battery 3

black

1,71

423 /1

S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2

S1/A: MK: Battery 1

blue

3,00

423 /2

S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2

S1/A: MK: Battery 1

black

3,00

423 /1

S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2

S2/1: MK: Battery 1

blue

3,00

423 /2

S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2

S2/1: MK: Battery 1

black

3,00

423 /1

S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1

blue

3,00

423 /2

S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1

black

3,00

140 / 1 MK: Battery 1

MK: Battery 2

blue

1,00

140 / 2 MK: Battery 1

MK: Battery 2

black

0,60

140 / 1 MK: Battery 2

MK: Battery 3

blue

1,00

140 / 2 MK: Battery 2

MK: Battery 3

black

0,60

141 / 1 F: Battery - 48V

MK: Battery (2b)

blue

0,60

141 / 2 F: Battery 0V

MK: Battery (1a)

black

0,40

*1)

*1)

*2)

X215-A70

X215-A71

X215-A74

X215-A74

X215-A74

X215-A76

X215-A76

X215-A76

X216-A74

X216-A74

*1) If required, adapt or shorten the cable length
*2) Only in case of XL-Rack: use the longer cable 423 instead the cable 422.
Table 45

142

List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3)

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Cable
No

Signal Name

53

BATT TEMP

Rack completion

From

To

Factory No.
S30864-*

F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,
(+0V) *1)

X216-A92

*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Table 46

f

Battery sensor cabling

WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,
use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Service 1

Service 2/1

AC/DC frame

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
AD panel

BAT

1 60A

LE panel

422

ϑ

418
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

140

141

1 60A

160 A

Battery 3

ϑ
141

141

140

140

160A

16 0A

Battery 2

Battery 2

141
Battery 1

141
Battery 1

Figure 137 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

DN0932994

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

143

Rack completion

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Service2/3

Service2/2
LE panel (S2)

Service1/A

LE panel (S2)

422

423

422

160 A

LE panel (S2)

Service2/1

AC/DC frame

ϑ

HU for LE 0 - 5
or

140

Battery 3

141

AD panel

1)

LE panel
(S1/A)

418

BAT

1 60A

1 60A

160 A

Battery 3

ϑ

ϑ
140

140

HU for LE 0 - 5

141
Battery 2
16 0A

160A

Battery 2
160A

Battery 2

141

16 0A

141

140

ϑ
141

141

Battery 1

141

Battery 1

141
Battery 1

Battery 1

Figure 138 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3)

from AC/DC system
0V -48V
to subsequent Service2 cabinet

A

BAT / -48V

-

160A

1)

AD panel (ADP)
+
MK:BATTERY 2)

+
BAT / -48V

-

MK:BATTERY 2)

BAT / -48V

-

160A

A

B

B

A

set of batteries in Service1A

1)

B

A
180A

160A

Service2

set of batteries in

A

B

-

MK:BATTERY 2)

B

BAT / -48V

+

MK:BATTERY 2)

BR 33

+

160A

1)

1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC
2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BARTTERY

1)

Figure 139 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2

144

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4.4.3

Rack completion

Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
The battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with AD panel variant
ADP-2V1 is shown in the following table.

Cable
No

From

To

518 /1

S1A:MK: Battery 1 or2

S1A: ADP/BAT (-)

518 /2

S1A:MK: Battery 1 or 2

S1A: ADP/BAT (+)

519 /1

S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1A: ADP/BAT (-)

519 /2

S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1A: ADP/BAT (+)

522 /1

S2/1:MK: Battery 3

S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

522 /2

S2/1:MK: Battery 3

S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

522 /1

S2/2:MK: Battery 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

522 /2

S2/2:MK: Battery 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

522 /1

S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S2/2: MK: Battery 3

522 /2

S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S2/2: MK: Battery 3

523 /1

S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

523 /2

S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2

523 /1

S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1

523 /2

S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3

S2/1: MK: Battery 1

540 / 1 MK: Battery 1

MK: Battery 2

540 / 2 MK: Battery 1

MK: Battery 2

540 / 1 MK: Battery 2

MK: Battery 3

540 / 2 MK: Battery 2

MK: Battery 3

541 / 1 F: Battery - 48V

MK: Battery (2b)

541 / 2 F: Battery 0V

MK: Battery (1a)

240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240

240;
240XL
240;
240XL
240;
240XL

Color

Length Factory No.
m
S30861-*

blue

1.90

black

2.10

blue

3.10

black

3.30

blue

2.60

black

2.40

blue

2.60

black

2.40

blue

2.60

black

2.40

blue

3.00

black

2.70

blue

3.00

black

2.70

blue

0.55

black

0.55

blue

0.55

black

0.55

blue

0.265

black

0.275

X215-A190

X215-A191

X215-A159

X215-A159

X215-A159

X215-A160

X215-A160

X215-A158

X215-A158

*1)

*1) only for battery pole with tapped hole M8: S30864-X215-A161; only for battery pole with tapped hole M10:
S30864-X215-A162
Table 47

Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Cable
No

Signal Name

53

BATT TEMP

From

To

F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,
(+0V) *1)

Factory No.
S30864-*
X216-A92

*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Table 48

DN0932994

Battery sensor cabling

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

145

cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of the insulation. Service2/3 Service2/2 LE panel (S2) Service1/A FAN#0 LE panel (S2) 160A LE panel (S2) Service2/1 522 FAN#0 ϑ FAN#1 FAN#1 522 *1) HU for LE 0 . ADP-2V1) 146 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3. use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6). Figure 140 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB f WARNING! Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors.5 Battery 2 160A Battery 2 541 518 160A 540 541 540 160A 540 ϑ 541 541 Battery 1 Battery 1 541 Battery 1 141 Battery 1 *1) E2 E1 B Batt 518-1 or 519-1 518-2 or 519-2 If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2 should be used to connect the MK: Battery with a Service1A Rack.5 or 540 540 523 Battery 3 541 160A 160A 160A Battery 3 ϑ ϑ 540 540 540 Battery 2 541 160A HU for LE 0 .

ADP-2V1) DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 147 .5 ϑ 522 540 540 518 6 x HU for LE 0 . Figure 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A.5 541 160A 160A Battery 3 ϑ 540 541 541 540 540 540 Battery 2 160A 160A Battery 2 541 541 Battery 1 Battery 1 *1) E2 E1 B Batt 518-1 or 519-1 518-2 or 519-2 If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2 should be used to connect the MK:Battery with a Service1A Rack. cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of the insulation.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion Service 1 Service 2/1 FAN#0 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#1 *1) 160A 6 x HU for LE 0 . equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3.

4.Rack completion 4.4 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Battery alarm cable connections The cable connections of the battery breaker alarm is shown in the circuit diagram below. Service1A Service2/n ACTC DCP:LEBREAK2 or ADPA/F:ACTC FAN#0 FAN#1 462 MK:BATTERY C NO NC A 160 A 1c 1b1a B 463 BAT / -48 V + 462 MK:BATTERY MK:BATTERY C NO NC A 160 A C NO NC 1c 1b1a A B 160 A 1c 1b1a B 463 BAT / -48 V BAT / -48 V + - + 463 MK:BATTERY MK:BATTERY C NO NC A 160 A C NO NC 1c 1b1a A B 160 A BAT / -48 V + 462 1c 1b 1a B BAT / -48 V - + - Cable 462: S30864-X211-A173 (Set: 2 x 462) Cable 463: S30864-X211-A174 Figure 142 Battery alarm cables 148 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . The alarm terminals of each MK:Battery within a service rack will be connected in series to lead them to the alarm-terminal of the ACTC.

4.RF Figure 143 Routing of the DC power supply wires +0 V -48 V unscre w DC supply wires Figure 144 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL Service2 Rack DC-Panel Service1 Rack DC-Panel 34 1) Base Rack DC-Panel Extension1 Rack 35 1) DC-Panel Extension2 Rack DC-Panel terminal block 33 1) 279 2) 36 1) 1) Component of MK: CARSV1 2) S30864-X211-A69 Figure 145 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 149 .5 Rack completion DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL) The DC cabling is required for routing of the -48V voltage from the DC panel of Service1 rack to the DC panels of all installed racks on site for power supply of the boards in Base and Extension racks and the link equipment inside the Service racks.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.

polarity from DC-Panel Service2/x Rack to DC-Panel Service2/x+1 Rack color 279 0V -48 V 5a 2a 5b 2b black blue Table 49 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks Service2 Rack DC-Panel 279 2) 1) Component of MK: CARSV1 Base Rack Service1 Rack DC-Panel 34 1) DC-Panel Extension1 Rack 35 1) DC-Panel 33 1) 2) S30864-X211-A69 Figure 146 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks 150 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . polarity from DC-Panel Service1 Rack to rack color 33 0V -48 V 13b 14b Service 2 / 5b Service 2 / 2b black blue 34 0V -48 V 11b 12b Base / 9b Base / 4b black blue 35 0V -48 V 9b 10b Extension 1 / 9b Extension 1 / 4b black blue 36 0V -48 V 7b 8b Extension 2 / 9b Extension 2 / 4b black blue DC.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB cable no.Cabling to further Service2/x cable no.

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

cable no.

polarity

Rack completion

from DC-Panel
Service1 Rack

to rack

color

33

0V
-48 V

11b
12b

Service2 / 5b
Service2 / 2b

black
blue

34

0V
-48 V

9b
10b

Base / 10b
Base / 5b

black
blue

35

0V
-48 V

7b
8b

Extension1 / 8b
Extension1 / 4b

black
blue

DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no.

polarity

from DC-Panel
Service2/x Rack

to DC-Panel
Service2/x+1 Rack

color

279

0V
-48 V

5a
2a

5b
2b

black
blue

Table 50

DN0932994

DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

151

Rack completion

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4.4.6

DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
The figure below shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADPAV3 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of BS-240 II / 240XL II.

Service1 A
FAN0

Base

FAN1

0V
-48V

ACTC

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08

LE
+-

2

FAN1

DC panel

FAN0

FAN1

180A

1

BE1E2 BE1E2

- - -

DC panel

FAN0

ACTC

0V
-48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

AD-Panel ADPAV3

ACTC

X29

Extension2 415

ACTC

0V
-48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

FAN11

FAN0

AC/DC

Extension1 414

413

BR 33

+++

BAT
01

+-

Service Socket

413
414
415

Figure 147 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

f

WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

cable
no.

polarity

from

to rack

color

413/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:B

Base

blue

413/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:B

Base

black

414/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:E1

Extension1

blue

414/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:E1

Extension1

black

415/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:E2

Extension2

blue

415/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:E2

Extension2

black

Table 51

FactoryNo.
S30864-*

Length
m

X215-A56

1,50

X215-A57

2,20

X215-A58

2,80

DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

152

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

DN0932994

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4.4.7

Rack completion

-48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
The following figure shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADP-2V1 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.

AD-Panel ADP-2V1
FAN#0

DC-Panel

DC-Panel

DC-Panel

FAN#1
FAN#0

COBA 0
COSA 0
COBA 1
COSA 1

CU CU
#0 #1

FAN#0

FAN#1

FAN#2

CU
#4

FAN#1

CU CU
#0 #1

CU
#5

CU
#4

FAN#2

FAN#3

515-1

E2

514-1

E1

513-1

B

515-2
514-2
513-2

Batt

CU
#5

FAN#1

CU CU
#0 #1

FAN#3

513-2
513-1

DCP:LEBREAK

FAN#0

CU
#4

FAN#2

514-2
514-1

CU
#5

FAN#3

515-2
515-1

If the cables 513 - 515 1/2
should be used to connect the
Base- and Extension Racks with a Service1A
Rack, equipped with AD-panel AD PAV3,
cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of
the insulation.

Figure 148 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

f

WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

cable
no.

polarity

from

to rack

color

513/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:B

Base

blue

513/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:B

Base

black

514/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:E1

Extension1

blue

514/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:E1

Extension1

black

515/1

-48V

S1/A:ADP:E2

Extension2

blue

515/2

0V

S1/A:ADP:E2

Extension2

black

Table 52

FactoryNo.
S30864-*
X215-A192

Length
m
1,15
1,10

X215-A193

1,75
1,70

X215-A194

2,35
2,30

DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

DN0932994

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

153

Rack completion

Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

4.4.8

-48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to
the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for connecting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example of
DC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations
are listed in Table 53. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,
the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.
The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.

Service2/3

Service2/2

0V-48V

DCP:LEBREAK2

+ -

X10

0V-48V

0V-48V

ACTC

DCP:LEBREAK2

+ -

X10

Service1 A

Service2/1
ACTC

DCP:LEBREAK2

+ -

X10

FAN0

ACTC

FAN1

AC/DC fram e
403
2)

406

406

403
1)
LE

403
4)

DCP:LEBREAK

X29

+-

2

0V -48V
++ - -

ACTC

AD Panel

403
3)
ACTC
X10

180A

1

BE1E2

BE1E2 BR 33

BAT
01

- - -

+++

+-

Servic e Socket

0V -48V

LE breaker

+ + - - X10

402

2): if Service1A without DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment
3), 4): if Service 2/1 with additional second DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment
for 1), 2), 3) and 4) see also table below

Figure 149 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
cable
no.

polarity

402

-48 V

S1/A:ADP:x29:1

S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3

blue

0V

S1/A:ADP:x29:2

S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1

black

403, 1) -48 V
0V
403, 2) -48 V
0V
403, 3) -48 V
0V
403, 4) -48 V
0V
Table 53

154

from

to rack

color

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4

blue

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2

black

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:ADP:x29:1

blue

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:ADP:x29:2

black

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3

blue

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1

black

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4

S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2

blue

S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2

S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1

black

FactoryNo.
S30864-*

Length
m

X215-A40 1,20

X215-A41 1,20

X215-A41 1,20

X215-A41 1,20

X215-A41 1,20

Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential

DN0932994

the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers. ADP-2V1) DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 155 . S30864-* Length m X215-A80 0. ADPAV3) (Cont. The cable types for possible configurations are listed in Table 54. The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB cable no. F:ACTC DCP:LEBREAK FAN#0 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 AD-Panel FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 HU # 0 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE HU # 3 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE HU # 5 for LE CU CU #0 #1 FAN#1 FAN#2 CU #4 CU #5 FAN#3 160A 160A HU # 0 for LE DC-Panel COBA 0 COSA 0 COBA 1 COSA 1 DCP:LEBREAK2 with LE in Service1A 402 X10 X10 33/M Service2 Rack X29 DCP:LEBREAK X10 503 Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Figure 150 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. polarity 406 406 Rack completion from to rack -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue 0V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black -48 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue 0V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black Table 53 color FactoryNo. A routing example of DC cables is shown in the following sketch.9 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. The clamp terminals for connecting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks.80 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A.) 4. ADP-2V1) The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks.4.80 X215-A80 0.

polarity 402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue 0V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue 0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue 0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue 0V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black 503 33/M 33/M Table 54 156 from to rack color FactoryNo.30 X211A152 0.90 X211A152 0. ADP-2V1) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . S30864-* Length m X215-A40 1.20 X215A164 1.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB F:ACTC DCP:LEBREAK FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 DC-Panel FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 HU # 0 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE HU # 3 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE HU # 5 for LE CU CU #0 #1 FAN#2 160A 160A HU # 0 for LE FAN#1 CU #4 CU #5 FAN#3 160A FAN#0 AD-Panel COBA 0 COSA 0 COBA 1 COSA 1 DCP:LEBREAK2 without LE in Service1A X10 X10 33/M Service2 Rack X29 503 Service2 Rack Base Rack Service1A Rack Figure 151 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A. ADP-2V1) cable no.90 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A.

The assignment of the cable length to the rack configuration is dependent on the mounting sequence. length 245 Base Service1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm 246 Service1/ Service1A Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm 247 Extension1 Service2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm 248 Service2/1 Extension2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm 249 Extension2 Service2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm S30864-X210-A66 12000 mm Cables for configurations with distance between the cabinets Table 55 Example for CAN-Bus cabling N CA RM TE a IN tin g r is es to r N CA IN T OU N CA ST TE Figure 152 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 157 . from CAN OUT to CAN IN Code no. The configuration rules for CAN-Bus connections are valid for BS-240 / BS-240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types. cable no.4.10 Rack completion CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided inside the Rack roof/cover area. The Table 55 and the Figure 153 show an example of CAN-Bus connections. This measure is mandatory. The CAN-Bus must be terminated at the end (CAN OUT) with the terminating resistor S30861-K2047-K. BS-240XL/240XL II The CAN-Bus will be routed in loop configuration through the racks to collect external and internal alarms and lead them to the ACT of the Base rack.

48 V CAN IN CAN IN . Figure 154 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack 158 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . The cable routing is illustrated by the following figures. delivered with the Base rack together.48 V . Therefore. BS-240XL IIB The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided inside the Rack roof/cover area. pre-fabricated cables have to be used.48 V CAN OUT SERIAL IF CAN OUT SERIAL IF CAN OUT SERIAL IF CAN TEST LPA CAN TEST LPA CAN TEST LPA terminating resistor rear side of racks 246 247 245 248 249 (for BS-240/-240II only) Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1 Base Extension1 Extension2 front side of racks Figure 153 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections 4. The CAN-bus has to be terminated with a termination resistor.11 CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB.4.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB EMI-P: RS CAN IN EMI-P: RE EMI-P: RB .

-A23.4. For each connection (Base to Extension1/2).30 m S30864-X210-A14 12. CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II. These cables (S30864-X210-A2.12 factory no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB BASE Rack completion EXTENSION 1 EXTENSION 2 CAN IN CAN IN CAN OUT CAN OUT CAN OUT termination resistor EMI-panel EMI-panel EMI-panel Figure 155 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks BASE EXTENSION CAN IN CAN OUT CAN OUT termination resistor EMI-panel EMI-panel Figure 156 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks cable no.00 m S30864-X210-A66 Table 57 4. The interfaces are located on the EMI panel of Base.These connections are absolute required for transmission of signalling and alarms between the racks. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 159 . In a standard configuration the same type of racks will be connected only.and Extension racks. 14 from to CAN out Base rack CAN in Extension 1 CAN out Extension 1 * CAN in Extension 2 * *) BS-240 IIB only Table 56 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks The following Can bus cable can be ordered: cable length 1. prefabricated cables are provided. -A38) are component of the relevant Extension racks.90 m S30864-X210-A12 3. BS-240XL/240XL II The SELIC-cabling (CC-link) provides a connection between the core modules in the Base rack and the carrier units in the Extension racks.

. 1 CU 0..1 CU 4..3 Figure 157 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240) Ext...7 Ext..3 Ext.2) CU 4.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Ext.2) CU 0.3 Ext.7 Ext. 1 CU 0.1 CU 0..3 CU 0.. 2 CU 4.....7 Ext.3 Extension 1 CU 0.7 CU 4..3 Extension 2 CU 0..3 X210-A2 Ext.7 Ext.7 CU 4......3 (Ext.7 Extension 2 CU 4...... 2 CU 4.: S30864-* 277 Ext.7 (Ext.3 CU 0...7 278 Table 58 160 Cable length 1975 mm List of CC-link cables BS-240 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .... 1 CU 4. 2 CU 0...3 277 278 Extension 1 Rack Base Rack Extension 2 Rack Figure 158 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II Racktype BS-240 Cable no... From interface Base Rack To interface Extension Rack Factory No.... 1 CU 4.....7 Extension 1 CU 4. 2 CU 0.

2 CU 4.7 Ext.11 Ext..11 Ext.3 Extension 1 CU 0. 1 CU 0. 1 CU 0.1 CU 8....11 Ext...: S30864-* Cable length 277 Ext.3 330 Base Rack 162 161 Extension 1 Rack Figure 160 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 161 ..7 Extension 1 CU 4...3 Extension 2 CU 0.....7 Ext.. 2 CU 0.1 CU 4....3 Ext...1 CU 0..1 CU 4.. 1 CU 4. From interface Base Rack To interface Extension Rack Factory No.7 278 Table 59 Rack completion List of CC-link cables BS-240 II Ext.. 1 CU 8.3 Ext..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Racktype BS-240 II Cable no. 1 CU 4..1 CU 8.7 Extension 2 CU 4...3 X210-A38 1920 mm Ext.7 Ext.3 Figure 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL) Ext...7 Ext....1 CU 0...

3 Extension1 CU 0.. Figure 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack Base Extension 1 Extension 2 CU 0-7 CU 8-15 CU 16-23 optional CU 16-23 red CU 8-15 red CU 16-23 CU 8-15 CU 8-15 red CU 8-15 red CU 8-15 CU 8-15 Figure 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks 162 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .11 BS-240XL Table 60 4......3 Extension1 CU 0..11 BS-240XL II 161 Ext..: S30864-* Cable length X210-A23 915 mm X210-A23 915 mm CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks The signal transfer between the rack is carried out by the cabling as shown in the following figures..1 CU 8.7 Extension1 CU 4.7 330 Ext....1 CU 0...7 Extension1 CU 4.11 Extension1 CU 8......1 CU 4..3 162 Ext..1 CU 0.4.3 162 Ext.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack type Cable No.7 330 Ext.. From interface Base Rack 161 Ext..13 To interface Extension Rack Factory No.1 CU 4.1 CU 8..11 Extension1 CU 8.

15 Extension1 CU 8....23 CU 16.15 CU 8.: S30864-* Cable length X215-A232 2. to Extension 12 CU 8..23 red Extension2 CU 16....15 redundancy 12 CU 16.83 m CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks NOTE Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connections to avoid transmission troubles! Cables for link redundancy are optionally.83 m X215-A231 5..... Extension1 CU 8.23 red 11 CU 8..23 Extension1 CU 16.23 CU 16..83 m X215-A232 2... Cable No......: S30864-* Cable length X215-A232 2.23 12 CU 8.15 13 CU 16..83 m X215-A231 5.15 red 10 CU 16.23 11 CU 8......23 10 CU 8.......23 red Extension1 CU 16.15 red Extension1 CU 8..23 red Table 61 g from Base rack Factory No...15 red...15 11 CU 16.23 redundancy Table 62 DN0932994 from Base rack Factory No.83 m CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 163 ..15 12 CU 16..23 redundancy CU 16..15 redundancy.15 10 CU 16.......83 m X215-A231 5......23 13 CU 8.23 Extension2 CU 16.83 m X215-A232 2.. to Extension 1 or 2 rack 10 CU 8.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion Base Extension 1 CU 0-11 CU 12-23 optional CU 16-23 red CU 8-15 red CU 16-23 CU 8-15 CU 16-23 red CU 8-15 red CU 16-23 CU 8-15 Figure 163 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks Cable No.15 red 11 CU 16.. CU 8..15 CU 8.15 Extension1 CU 8...

: S30864-* X215-A231 Cable length 5.23 redundancy CU 16.15 redundancy 13 CU 16...Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Cable No. 164 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . to Extension 13 CU 8.23 redundancy Table 62 g from Base rack Factory No...15 redundancy CU 8..) NOTE Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connections to avoid transmission troubles! Cables for link redundancy are optionally...83 m CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks (Cont..

S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS1202V6. serial no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. The required minimum distances for the rack variants are listed in . Generation 1. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with an interconnection hole in the side panels.5 Rack completion Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration) This chapter provides information about the cable connections between racks. that cable connections between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible. dependent on the rack type and equipping variant (BS-240 / 240XL with BS-240 II / 240XL II). to allow the rack interconnection of both rack types. Cover Cover Cables: e. The power cables of the BS-240 cabinets are routed behind the DC-Panel cover and the power cable of the BS-240 II cabinets are routed visible in front of the DC-Panel. g NOTE The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. CAN-Bus. the top cover of the rack have to be mounted always! Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 165 . The required distances rack rear to wall must be considered. Inter-rack cables are not pre-installed in the factory and foreseen for setup on site. the relevant minimum distance to the wall is 150 mm. If racks have to be fixed to the floor with earthquake kits. Generation View of rear side Figure 164 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing g DN0932994 NOTE According to the relevant EMC requirements. the BS-240 racks have be shifted 50 mm away from the wall. From this follows. CAN-Bus SELIC EMC-cable 2.and EMC/grounding have to be routed through removed break-out pieces at the rear of the rack‘s top covers (see Figure 164). The -48V DC cable connection between the racks will be routed through the cut-outs at the side walls of the racks. if these rack types will be used. In case of mixed configuration. Therefore the rack interconnections for SELIC-. The covered cut-outs plates at the sides of the rack and the break-out pieces of the top covers of first and second generation are not corresponding.g.

1 Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks The battery backup time of already installed BS-240 racks can be extended with additional battery sets inside of BS-240 II racks.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. SIEMENS SIEMENS 110/3M 0V -48V 0V -48V ACTC 111/3M ACTC LE Panel (S2) to S2/3 LE Panel (S2) FAN#0 from S1 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 110/4M 111/4M ϑ 160A 160A FAN#0 FAN#1 LE-Panel BAT2 F:AC/DC 1 111/2 111/1 110/2 110/1 FAN#0 FAN#1 166 ϑ BAT3 FAN#1 HU # 0 for LE 110/2 HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE 111/2 HU # 3 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE 160A FAN#0 Service1 Service2/1 Service2/2 Service2/3 111/4M F:AC/DC 2 110/4M 181 182 160A 160A BAT2 111/3M 110/3M ϑ 168 BAT1 166 166 168 168 ϑ BAT0 BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BS-240 II Rack BS-240 II Rack BS-240 Rack F:AC/DC 1 ϑ F:AC/DC 2 ϑ 112/3 112/1 a a a a a a a a T0 25 26 27 28 ϑ 112/2 b b b b + - BAT 0 BAT 1 T0 14 15 16 17 ϑ 112/4 b b b b T1 T1 + - BS-240 Rack + .+ BAT 2 BAT 3 Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks 166 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . In addition to the battery kits that will used for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240 II).5. cable kits are provided for the connection of BS-240 II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-240 Service1 rack.

. BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1. the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented. BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1. If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration. BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2. From Rack completion To Factory no. length 112/1 Service1. – Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the second generation. BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2. from to Factory no. length Color 110/1/M 111/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-) S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+) S30864X211-A146 1300 mm blue black 110/2/M 111/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-28b S1/F:AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-) S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+) S30864X211-A147 3300 mm blue black 110/3/M 111/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-15b S1/F:AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-) S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+) S30864X211-A148 3700 mm blue black 110/4/M 111/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-17b S1/F:AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-) S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+) S30864X211-A149 4600 mm blue black Table 63 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks Cable no.V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum current rating of 75 Ampere. T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm 112/2 Service2/1. T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm 112/3 Service2/2..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Cable no. the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation: – Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevant MK:BATTERYV4. T 0 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm 112/4 Service2/3. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 167 . T 1 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm Table 64 Overview of the tempresistor cables g NOTE The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/.V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A)...

Service2/2 Rack Service1 Service2/1 Rack SIEMENS SIEMENS 0V -48V 0V -48V ACTC ACTC LE Panel (S2) LE Panel (S2) FAN#0 FAN#0 FAN#0 FAN#1 HU # 0 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE FAN#0 F:AC/DC 1 111/2 # # # # 0 for 1 for 2 for 3 for 110/2 LE LE LE LE 110/1 FAN#1 111/3M to HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE S2/2 110/3M to S2/3 111/4M 110/4M F:AC/DC 2 160A 160A 111/1 FAN#0 FAN#1 HU HU HU HU from S1 FAN#1 FAN#1 ϑ 166 ϑ ϑ 160A 160A 168 168 BAT1 BAT 0 second Generation first Generation BAT2 second Generation 166 F:AC/DC 1 ϑ F:AC/DC 2 ϑ 112/3 112/1 a a a a a a a a T0 25 26 27 28 ϑ 112/2 b b b b BAT 0 BAT 1 ϑ 112/4 b b b b T1 T1 + . cable kits are provided for the connection of BS-240XL II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS240XL Service1 rack.Rack completion 4.2 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks The battery backup time of already installed BS-240XL racks can be extended with additional battery sets inside of BS-240XL II racks.5. In addition to the battery kits that will used for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240XL) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240XL II).+ - T0 14 15 16 17 + - + - BAT 2 BAT 3 Figure 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 168 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .

BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2.. BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2. the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented. length Color 110/1 111/1 S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 (-) S1 BAT0 (+) S30864-X211A33 1750 mm blue black 110/1/M 111/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-) S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+) S30864-X211A133 1750 mm blue black 110/2/M 111/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-28b S1/F:AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-) S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+) S30864-X211A134 3300 mm blue black 110/3/M 111/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-15b S1/F:AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-) S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+) S30864-X211A135 4200 mm blue black 110/4/M 111/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-17b S1/F:AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-) S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+) S30864-X211A136 4700 mm blue black Table 65 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks Cable no.V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Cable no.. From Rack completion To Factory no.. T 0 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm 112/2 Service2/1. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevant MK:BATTERYV4. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 169 . the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation: – Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/.. If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration. – Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the second generation. T 1 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm 112/3 Service2/2. length 112/1 Service1. T 1 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm Table 66 Overview of the tempresistor cables g NOTE The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/. BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1. BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1.V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum current rating of 75 Ampere. from to Factory no. T 0 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm 112/4 Service2/3.

– Route the wires through the rack interconnection holes the Service1 rack. – Insert the wires into the matching WAGO terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accordance with Figure 168.+ BAT 2 BAT3 Figure 168 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC 170 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .Rack completion 4.3 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Battery cabling activities Connect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows – Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black) at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY. – Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm. – Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.+ BAT 0 BAT1 + . precutted in the factory connection with F:AC/DC Connection with MK:Battery Figure 167 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M F:AC/DC 2 F:AC/DC 1 T0 T0 T1 T1 + . – Plug in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T 0 and T1 (see Table 64 for BS-240 and Table 66 for BS-240XL).5. – Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.1 to Base 1) first Generation second Generation second Generation 1) Type of cable (16 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C105 (black) C39195-Z70-C66 (blue) Figure 169 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1 The following rule must be taken into account: – The DC-breaker ratings of Service1 are limited (50A) for DC power supply the Base and Extension racks. Base Service1 Extension1 DC-Panel ACTC 0V -48V 1) BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08 FAN0 FAN11 ACTC 0V -48V BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 FAN0 DC panel FAN1 DCP:RSHS1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b c b c c bc c b b b b b b b b (to Serv. Therefore only CU configurations can be implemented in Base and Extension.2) (to Ext.2) to Ext.4 Rack completion -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base. which DC supply currents not exceed the breaker rating of 50A.5. Extension An example of mixed configuration. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 171 . Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second generation) is shown in Figure 169.

%0ANEL 6 6 6 6   (5FOR.5 -48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base.3 $#023(" &!.5.% (5FOR. ADPAV3) Cable no.6 m S30864-X215A127 blue black 2. 1. ADPAV3) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .% A (5FOR. . BR29 and BR30) must be replaced by a 50A type! This reduction in power for the affected rack must be considered for configuration planning! Therefore a mounting kit must be ordered with three 50A breakers (Factory no. g NOTE If a Service1A supplies a Base (second generation) or an Extension (second generation) the 80A DC-breakers (AD-panel: BR28.8 m S30864-X215A129 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A. Extension The Figure 170 shows an example for the -48V power supply connection of a Service1A rack BS-240 II with Base and Extension BS-240. E1 (S1A.2 m S30864-X215A128 blue black 2.% FIRST'ENERATION FIRST'ENERATION SECOND'ENERATION Figure 170 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base.: S30864-X215-A126). The Service1A rack is equipped with the AD-panel ADPA.% A A A A           BB C BB B B B B B B B 6 6 TO!$0ANEL3! TO!$0ANEL3! (5FOR. %XTENSION "ASE 3ERVICE! 3)%-%.% ! !#4# !#4# "2 8 A A A A A 6 " %% "% %   A A A A A A AA A A A A A B A A AA B C C C C C B CC C C BCC D C C C C C B C C C C BCC D . 461 from to Color S1A/ADPA/B/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue S1A/ADPA/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 462 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V S1A/ADPA/E1/ 0V Extension1/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V Extension1/DCP inside/ 9b/0V 463 S1A/ADPA/E2/ -48V S1A/ADPA/E2/ 0V Extension2/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V Extension2/DCP inside/ 9b/0V Table 67 172 Length Factory No. !$0ANEL $#023(% !#4# &!.% ! (5FOR.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.% A           BB C BB B B B B B B B (5FOR.

ADP-2V1) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 173 .and Extension Racks with a Service1A Rack. 513 514 515 Table 68 DN0932994 from to Color Length S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1. equipped with AD-panel AD PA. ADP-2V1) Cable no.70 m S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2.10 m S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.15 m S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion If the Service1A is equipped with an AD-panel ADP-2V1. cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of the insulation. DCP:LEBREAK AD-Panel ADP-2V1 DCP:RSHB DCP:RSHB DCP:RSHE FAN#0 FAN#1 513 ACTC 514 a a a a a a a a a a ACTC 515* a a aa a a a a a b a a a a a a aa b 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 bb c bb b b b b b b b 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 bb b b bb c b b b b b c c c c c b cc c c bcc d c c c c c b cc c c bcc d 0V -48V 0V -48V 514 513 to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A Base Extension1 first Generation first Generation Service1A second Generation a 515-1 514-1 513-1 515-2 514-2 513-2 Batt 515* to Extension2 If the cables 513-515 1/2 should be used to connect the Base.35 m S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V black 2.75 m S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1.30 m Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V Factory No. Figure 171 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A.and Extension racks of the BS-240 as shown in the figure below. connect it with the Base. S30864-X215A192 S30864-X215A193 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A.

1 to Base 160A 160A (to Serv.2) second Generation b c b c c bc c b b b b b b b b 160A FAN#0 DCP:RSHS1 0V -48V second Generation first Generation Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx Type of cable (10 mm 2): Factory No.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. g NOTE For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implementation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory. Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second generation) is shown in Figure 172.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black) C39195-Z70-C65 (blue) Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152 Type of cable (6 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Figure 172 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks 174 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . Serv ice2/2 Rack SIEMENS Service2/1 Ra ck Service 1 SIEMENS 0V -48V ACTC ACTC LE Panel (S2) 33/M 33/M FAN#1 LE Panel (S2) FAN#0 HU HU HU HU to Service2/3 33 FAN#1 # # # # 0 for 1 for 2 for 3 for LE LE LE LE a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 HU # 4 for LE HU # 5 for LE 160A b b b b 33 (to Ext.6 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 An example of mixed configuration.2) to Ext.5.

ADPAV3) DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 175 .: C39195-Z70-C89 (black) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Figure 173 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. g NOTE g NOTE Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack. Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation) is shown in Figure 173 (example with AD-panel ADPA).: C39195-Z70-C89 (black) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152 Type of cable (6 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black) C39195-Z70-C114 (blue) Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119 Type of cable (6 mm 2): Factory No. The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must not exceed 25A.5 mm 2): Factory No.- +++ 0V -48V a 0 1 + - 402 LE PaneL 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc HU # 0 for LE HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE to Service2/3 first Generation 33/M to Service2/2 first Generation HU # 4for LE HU # 5for LE 160A 33/M second Generation Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A) Service2/1 Service2/2 DCP:RSHS2 ACTC - ACTC 33/M to Service1A 453 33/M a a a a a a a FAN#0 FAN#1 453 to Service2/1 0V Service1A SIEMENS DCP:RSHS2 0V -48V a a a a a a a a a -48V a AD Panel LE 180A +- ACTC BR 33 X29 -48V B E 1E 2 BE 1E2 .5.7 Rack completion DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2 An example of mixed configuration.. component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack) Type of cable (2.

33/M: S30864-X215-A152. 503: S30864-X215-A164.30 m Cable No. length 1.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2 ACTC 33/M ACTC 503 33/M a a a a a a a FAN#1 to Service1A to Service2/1 0V FAN#0 503 33/M 0V -48V a a a a a a a a a -48V a a 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc 33/M 33/M to Service2/3 first Generation to Service2/2 first Generation Service1A second Generation Cable No.90 m Figure 174 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A. length 0. ADP-2V1) 176 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .

Extension An example of mixed configuration.2) 35 to Ext.8 Rack completion DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base.5.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black) C39195-Z70-C135 (blue) (Component of MK:CARSV1 / S30864-X215-A28) Figure 175 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second generation) is shown in Figure 175. E1 DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 177 . Base Service1 Extension1 DC-Panel ACTC 0V -48V 1) BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08 DCP:R12S1 FAN0 FAN11 ACTC 0V -48V BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 FAN0 DC panel FAN1 a a a a a a a a b a a a a b b a b 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b c c c c b b b b b b b b (to Serv.1 34 to Base 1) first Generation second Generation second Generation 1) Type of cable (25 mm 2): Factory No.

- +++ 0 1 + - LE Panel 0V -48V HU # 0 for LE a a a a a a a a aa a 1514131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 a a a a a b b b bb b b bb b bb bb bb b b b b c c c b c c c c c c c c b c c b HU # 1 for LE -48V 413 0V -48V 414 to AD Panel S1A 160A to AD Panel S1A c c c b b b 0V HU # 2 for LE 160A a aa a 131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 c c c c b b HU # 3 for LE a a a a a a a a ACTC BR 33 X29 DCP:R12E second Generation first Generation first Generation 1) Type of cable (25 mm 2): Factory No.5.9 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base.. Extension The Figure 176 shows an example of the -48V power supply connections between a Service1A rack and Base / Extension rack (first generation).: C39195-Z70-C134 (black) C39195-Z70-C135 (blue) Figure 176 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base. Extension1 Base Service1A SIEMENS DC-Panel FAN#0 DC-Panel ACTC FAN#1 ACTC DCP:R12B AD Panel LE 180A +-48V B E 1 E2 BE 1E2 . E1 178 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .Rack completion 4.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.5.10 Rack completion DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 An example of mixed configuration.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black Type of cable (10 mm ) C39195-Z70-C65 (blue) Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152 2): Factory No. 1 to Base 160A HU # fo 0r LE HU # fo 1r LE HU # fo 2r LE HU # fo 3r LE HU # fo 4r LE HU # fo 5r LE 33 160A 160A 160A FAN#0 Service1 DCP:RSHS1 second Generatio n first Generatio n Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx 2): Factory No. Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second generation) is displayed in Figure 177. g NOTE For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implementation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory! Service2/2 Rack SI EM ES N -4 8V 0V ACTC LE Pa nel (S2) 33/M FAN# 0 FAN# 1 to Service2/3 Service2/1 Rack SIEMEN S -4 8V 0V ACTC LE Pa ne l(S2) 33/M FAN# 0 FAN# 1 HU # fo 0r LE HU # fo 1r LE HU # fo 2r LE HU # fo 3r LE HU # fo 4r LE HU # fo 5r LE second Generatio n FAN# 1 a aa aaaa aa aaaaaa 1514131211109 8 7 6543 21 b bb b b c b b b b bb bb cbcc bc 33 (to Serv.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black Type of cable (6 mm ) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Figure 177 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 179 .2 ) to Ext.

(DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A) Service2/2 DCP:RSHS2 Service2/1 ACTC 33/M ACTC 33/M to Service1A 453 33/M a a a a a a a FAN#0 FAN#1 453 to Service2/1 0V Service1A SIEMENS DCP:RSHS2 0V -48V a a a a a a a a a -48V a AD Panel LE 180A +- ACTC BR 33 X29 -48V B E 1E 2 BE 1E2 .11 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2 An example of mixed configuration. Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation) is shown in Figure 178.. The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must not exceed 25A.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152 Type of cable (6 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black) C39195-Z70-C114 (blue) Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119 Type of cable (6 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black) C39195-Z70-C88 (blue) (high power cable type) Figure 178 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 180 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .5 mm 2): Factory No.- +++ 0V -48V a 0 1 + - 402 LE Panel 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc 33/M 33/M to Service2/2 HU # 1 for LE HU # 2 for LE HU # 3 for LE 160A to Service2/3 HU # 0 for LE 160A 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b b b b b b b first Generation first Generation second Generation Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40.5. component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack) Type of cable (2.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. g NOTE g NOTE Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.

For mixed configuration with distance between the racks (Table 70) the cable sets include an appropriate CAN-Bus cable.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets) Rack type Table 70 BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL / 240XL II Ext. cable length 4120 mm or 6970 mm 4070 mm or 6920 mm 3612 mm or 6462 mm S30864-* X211-A123 or A118 X211-A132 or A133 X211-A125 or A120 cable length 4070 mm or 6920 mm 4070 mm or 6920 mm 3612 mm or 6462 mm S30864-* X211-A132 or A133 X211-A126 or A121 X211-A134 or A135 cable length 3612 mm or 6462 mm 3612 mm or 6462 mm 3114 mm or 5960 mm S30864-* X211-A136 or A137 X211-A138 or A139 X211-A122 or A116 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 181 .12 Rack completion SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration) In case of extension of an existing Base Station system with additional Extension racks the following combinations are possible: – – – – – – BS-240 Base -> BS-240 II Extension BS-240 Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension BS-240 II Base -> BS-240 Extension BS-240 II Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 Extension BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 II Extension The necessary cables for extension combinations have to be ordered additionally (see Table 69 and Table 70).5. BS-240 Base BS-240 II Base BS-240XL / 240XL II Base DN0932994 1920 mm cable length 1460 mm X210-A74 BS-240XL / 240XL II Ext.: S30864-* BS-240 Ext. BS-240 Base BS-240 II Base cable length see standard configuration S30864-* cable length 1920 mm S30864-* BS-240XL / 240XL II Base Table 69 X210-A68 1460 mm X210-A68 X210-A27 see standard configuration 1460 mm 1460 mm S30864-* X210-A75 X210-A69 see standard configuration Selic cable lengths with Factory No. BS-240 II Ext. Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-* BS-240 Ext.

+++ + 1 Pa ne l 0V -48VLE # LE 0 for # 1 for LE # 2 for LE # 3 for LE # 4for LE # 5for LE 160 A HU HU HU HU HU HU BS-240 II BS-240 II BS-240XL II Figure 179 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) Use the following pre-fabricated cables for connection of the racks: – Cable 414: DC cable pair (25 mm2) with braided shield. This measure guarantees a proper contact between the cable screen and the mesh screened rubber profiles. screening measure see view B cable duct 414 screening measure see view A Extension1 AC TC 0V -48V BR 06DCpane BR 01 BR 02 BR 04 BR 05 BR 03 l cable ties FAN0 Service1A FAN# 1 FAN1 413 Base FA N0 # MSU:DC AC TC 0V -4 8V BR 06 BR 01 BR 02 BR 04 BR 05 BR 07 BR 08 BR 03 FAN0 FAN1 TC ADPa nel LE + 180 -AAC 33 X2 9 BR -4 8V B 1E 2 E B 1 E 0 E2 --.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.6. C39195-Z70-C158 (BK Type S07V-C4V5-K) – Cable 446: Grounding cable (16 mm2). tinned. copper wires 0. 182 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .6 4.1 Combination of racks with different heights BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension A BS-240XL II Extension rack can be added to an existing BS-240 II Base rack to increase BTS capacity.15 mm. C39195-Z70-C105 (BK Type S07V-K) The outer insulation of both DC-cables that to be routed through the cable feeding module of the Service1A rack has to be removed at the EMC-gasket (see Figure 180).

DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 183 . The cable is equipped with cable lugs at both ends and will be attached to the M8 ground bolts at the rear side of the EMI panel.4.7 4.10.7. 4.5. Base The racks can be installed with a gap between the racks as shown in the following figure. For CAN-Bus cabling refer to the chapter 4. DC -cables from Service1A rack common ground cable from Service1A rack 446 rear side of rack grounding bolts 414-2 +0V screen connection 414-1 -48V to MSU:DC Figure 181 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension The connection between the racks will be completed by the routing of the common ground cable no. Connect the cables 4141 and 414-2 to the terminal block of the MSU:DC.bar stress . For SELIC cabling refer to the chapter 4. Remove the insolation of the cables approximately 15 mm for contact of the screen to the stress relieving clamp at the right edge of rack (Figure 181).relieving cable ties Figure 180 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module Route the DC-cables to the rear side of the Extension rack in a suitable cable duct.12.1 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks BS-240XLU II.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion -48V +0V 414 15 mm EMC . Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB. 446.

Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 182 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks Before starting the installation. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . pay attention to the following rules: • • • • • 184 The racks of the B-version (in this case the Base rack) do not provide an opening in the side panel for the DC cables to the Service 1A rack. Use cables with braided shield only. Route all cables from the Base rack to the Service 1A / Extension rack inside a cable duct. The unused opening in the side wall of the BS-240 XLU II Extension rack has to be closed with it‘s cover plate. Store the extra length of pre-fabricated cables in the cable duct.

.15. not conn.23.15. 600 600 Code-no.. connector C DN0932994 CU12. connector A connector A.23. connector A CU20. CU20.. connector B CU16.19..15 redundancy connector D CU12.20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 185 ... not conn...15.19.....23 redundancy connector D Table 71 length CU16.. connector B 3..Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion Figure 183 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks Further informations are provided in the section “Combination of racks with different heights”...... connector C CU16. Select the CC-link cables dependend on the required length and connect them according the following tables: Cable no.. CU12.20 m connector A.23. connector B CU16. S30864X215-A235 S30864X215-A235 from to Base B-version Extension A-version CU12. connector B CC-cables l=3.

. The following cables are provided: Code no..15 redundancy connector D CU12. Figure 184 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext.. if no link redundancy is required. S30864-X210-A12 1.. connector C CU16. connector B 6.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Cable no.....23. connector A connector A.. CU12. not conn.19.10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) The figure below shows the CC-link connections between the racks.. S30864X215-A236 601 S30864X215-A236 from to Base B-version Extension A-version CU12.23. Note. that connectors “D” of the Base rack will remain unplugged....90 m S30864-X210-A14 3..23 redundancy connector D Table 72 length CU16.. CU20....15..4.15. connector A CU20.. connector B CU16.23. not conn.19.30 m Table 73 186 Cable length Overview of Can-Bus cables Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack Install the CAN-Bus connections between racks as described in section “4. connector C CU12.10 CANbus connections. connector B CC-cables l=6. 601 Code-no.15.10 m connector A. connector B CU16.

1.80 m S30864-X210-A63 5.20 m S30864-X210-A13 2. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 187 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Code no.00 m S30864-X210-A11 1. Rack completion Cable length S30864-X210-A66 12.80 m S30864-X210-A61 7.) The DC cables from the Service1A rack to the Base and Extension rack have to be prepared on site.60 m S30864-X210-A15 4.00 m S30864-X210-A60 6.00 m Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables (Cont. For the selection of the cable type and the several installation steps. refer to section 4.6.

the mounting kit MK:LE is needed always and designed for 19” units.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. MK:LE Figure 185 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE 188 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .703. to provide the Abis interface. Which equipment will be used depends on customer requirements.8 Installation of link equipment The link equipment acts as a front end. The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of the mounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap. Different equipment can be used for wire or radio transmission. that can be installed depends on the height of the units. The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB. g NOTE For connections between Abis interface in the Base rack and link equipment in the Service rack. F:NT (german market only). pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G. For the installation of link equipment. so that the airflow inside the rack will not be affected. The MK:LE will fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left side of the rack. The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or the frame for 2 NTPM. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing. The number of link equipment.

2. 2. 3. Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cable feeding module without any pressure and tension.1 Rack completion Installation of microwave equipment In case of microwave transmission.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the front connectors of ACTC (see the following figure). Fix removable part in its original position. g NOTE The outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area of the cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids... MUE -48 V (blue) Figure 186 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL) DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 189 . 6. PUE +0 V (red) DC_μWave. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected to the microwave units. The connector type and fixing torque depends on the equipment. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors of microwave indoor units. Service rack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 microwave connector s up to 9 cables S30864-K2045-X-*-7483 frame for link equipment AL15_P μWave (white) AL15_P AL_GND (black) DC_μWave. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. 4. 5. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties. Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows: 1. 3. Remove the front part of cable feeding module.. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrack mounting bar with cable ties. Because construction differences between the BS-240 and the BS-240 II rack. The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit of the Service rack and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. In case of BS-240 Service racks perform the following steps: 1.8. proceed in different ways.. provided by the customer. the indoor units inside the Service rack have to be connected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.

401) Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC: 1. remove the cover plate Figure 187 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no.0. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0. that should be installed. V39118-Z4005-A91). Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and the terminal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1. 190 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . 3. The number of breakers depends on the volume of microwave units. In the DC-panels of the Service2 rack. 5. S30864-X215-A39) at the 2-pole connectors X25F (R).X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.5 mm2 (e. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker. 3. 4.34/1. 4. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring terminals of the ACTC. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrack mounting bar with cable ties. the ACTC module is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers. 5. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack mounting bar with cable ties. The type depends on the alarm interface of the microwave units. V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends.08 mm2 . 401. equip the stranded wires with a connector. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.g. LI7Y 2x0. that should be connected at the DC-input of the microwave units.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-240 II Service1A rack as follows: 1.BR06 (connectors X25F (R) .3 blue/black) to the required length. the link equipment breakers BR01. 2. If necessary. In this case.X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block. The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both rack types. 2. The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in the BS-240 II Service2 racks are equal to the Service 1A rack.

408 ACTC. 401 example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker Figure 188 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) +0 V 4A or 10A ACTC.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion +0 V 4A or 10A 4A or 10A 4A or 10A 4A or 10A X32F X31F mWave 7 mWave 6 mWave 4 mWave 5 X28F mWave 3 mWave 11 mWave 2 mWave 10 mWave 1 mWave 9 X32R 4A or 10A X31R 4A or 10A X30F 4A or 10A X30R 4A or 10A X29F BR08 X29R BR07 X28R BR06 X27F BR05 X27R BR04 X26F BR03 X26R BR02 X25F BR01 mWave 0 mWave 8 X25R -48 V cables no. Therefore the pre-fabricated cable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of a microwave unit at each connector. 401 cables no. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25 female connector. FAN mWave 5 mWave 11 mWave 4 mWave 10 mWave 3 mWave 9 mWave 2 mWave 8 mWave 1 mWave 7 cables no. The cable is used as a splitter. 401 cable no. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 191 . The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the connection with the OVPT / ABISCON. DC IN X32F 4A or 10A X32R 4A or 10A X31F 4A or 10A X31R 4A or 10A X30F 4A or 10A X30R 4A or 10A X29F 4A or 10A X29R BR08 X28F BR07 X28R BR06 X27F BR05 X27R BR04 X26F BR03 X26R BR02 X25F BR01 mWave 0 mWave 6 X25R -48 V 407 Figure 189 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II) The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Base rack and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units.

DLB 9 17 13 GND/G --- --- 17 PCM 3 . cable no.ULB 6 19 8 GND/G 3 8 12 PCM 3 .ULA 1 6 10 PCM 3 . S30864-X211-A112 PCM 1 .ULA 1 9 4 PCM 4 . Plug Sub D25 Pin No.ULB 6 16 14 GND/G 3 18 18 PCM 2 .DLB 9 20 7 GND/G --- --- 11 PCM 4 .DLB 9 15 19 GND/G --- --- 23 PCM 2 .ULA 1 1 22 PCM 1 .ULB 6 14 20 GND/G 3 3 18 PCM 1 .DLA 5 5 15 PCM 2 .Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f Pin No.DLA 5 7 9 PCM 3 .DLA 5 10 3 PCM 4 .DLA 5 2 21 PCM 1 . OVPT Terminal Pin No.ULB 6 21 2 GND/G 3 23 6 PCM 4 . S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 cable no.ULA 1 4 16 PCM 2 . 192 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .DLB 9 22 1 GND/G --- --- 5 GND/G --- --- 28 Table 74 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both rack designs is given in the following figure.

that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM. g NOTE It is necessary. order-no. order-no.: S30864-X215-A39. female with M3 fixings for PCM input – SubD 25.2 Installation of NTPM In case of transmission via terrestrial lines. Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU.3 BL/SW VS) 4) can be ordered as prepared cable (Octopus cable). (power cable for microwave module) 7) can be ordered as prepared cable. black: 0 Vdc) 6) can be ordered as prepared cable.34/1. (twisted pair. order-no.8. the NTPMs are placed inside the Service rack.: S30861-K2045-X-*-7483. called frame F:NT. C39195-Z75-C510 (Type: LI7Y 2x0.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB to ODU Service Rack Rack completion to ODU BS-240 II / 240XL II BS-240 / 240XL Service Rack Base Rack Base Rack top view top view OVPT OVPT 7) 7) EMI panel EMI panel ACTC DC panel rack front ACTC rack front 1) breaker panel 1) alarm lines 6DC  SUPPLYLINES m Sub D 25 f 4) 3) twisted pair Sub D 25 m 3UB$ f m PCM1 PCM0 4) f 3UB$ F:CORE m -48 Vdc supply and alarm lines 6) Sub D 9 f 3UB$ m f 4) Sub D 25 f m m f 4) PCM1 PCM0 f m SubD 9 F:CORE 2) 2) LE1-4 LE1-4 LE5-8 LE5-8 1) integral part of cabinet cabling 2) has to be prepared on site 3) pair of stranded wires.g. The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces: – SubD 9. male with M3 fixings for PCM output DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 193 . e. to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT. male with M3 fixings for -48 V output – SubD 25.: S30864-X211-A112 Figure 190 Overview of microwave cabling 4. order-no.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 5) can be ordered as prepared cable. blue: -48 Vdc. allowing the installation of up to 2 NTPM side by side.

For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricated cable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. For the BS-240 II Service1A / Service2 racks use the DC power cable S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) and the -48VDC input of the F:NT.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB In case of the BS-240. the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part of the F:NT. BS-240 II / 240XL II PCM lines Base Rack Service Rack OVPT OVPT PCM0 PCM1 BS-240 / 240XL PCM lines Base Rack Service Rack OVPT OVPT PCM0 PCM1 6) 4) 4) 2) 2) EMI panel EMI panel DC panel ACTC ACTC rack front rack front -48 V 2) -48Vdc 3) supply lines 1) 1) F:CORE PCM1 PCM0 F:CORE PCM1 PCM0 F:NT1 F:NT1 7) 6) 7) 5) F:NT2 5) F:NT2 1) Integral part of cabinet cabling 2) has to be prepared on site 3) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A109 4) cable S30864-X211-A59 5) see Figure: Interface on frame F:NT 6) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT 7) 2 PCM links per F:NT if fully equipped with 2 modules Figure 191 Overview of NTPM cabling variants 194 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is installed inside the racks is given in the following figure.

6 -48 V 4.ULA 4 4 PCM 2 .ULB 14 14 GND/G 3 3 PCM 1 .DLB 15 15 GND/G 16 16 PCM 2 .9 Table 75 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25 female pin F:NT PCM-OUTPUT subD 25 male pin PCM 1 .ULA 1 1 PCM 1 .DLB 18 18 GND/G 19 19 Table 76 DN0932994 F:NT -48 V.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion .5.48 VDC to OVPT / ABISCON external PCM lines Figure 192 Interfaces on frame F:NT Name 0V 1.DLA 5 5 PCM 2 .DLA 2 2 PCM 1 .ULB 17 17 GND/G 6 6 PCM 2 .2. subD 9 female pin Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 195 .

each relevant modules provide code keys.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. A lever mechanism will be used for fixing of the Core modules COBA and COSA. Two variants for the fixing of the modules in the subracks does exist. fixing screw lever mechanism Figure 193 Fixing variants of the modules push together lever mechanism in open position Figure 194 Handling of the lever mechanism To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions.The handling is shown in the figure below. Module DUAMCO 7 FICOM 7 DIAMCO 8 CU 6 COBA 1 COSA 2 Table 77 196 Code Key Module HW code key Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . Fixing screws at the upper and lower edge are used for securing of the RF modules.9 Installation of modules and cover parts For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the correct removal and replacement of the Core.and RF modules.

Rack completion 2 Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB code key no. HYBRID6 configurations and together with CP:90MMV1 for ACOM slots Table 78 DN0932994 article name Relations between cover parts and modules Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 197 . Cover parts with different outer dimensions are provided. Figure 195 Location of the code key no. with CP:30MMV1 together for ACOM slots S30861-K2378-X CP:30MMV1 30 mm for core slots. – Insert the modules without any pressure. so that the proper air flow inside the rack is guaranteed. this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors. The following table gives information about the relations between modules and cover parts. All empty slots of a sub-rack have to be closed by cover parts. Pay attention to the following hints: – After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the backplane. – Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number. code number width applicable for: S30861-K2019-X CP:CUV1 90 mm CU slots version 1 S30861-K2247-X CP:CUV2 90 mm CU slots version 2 S30861-K2020-X CP:DIAMCOV1 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 1 S30861-K2248-X CP:DIAMCOV2 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 2 S30861-K2021-X CP:ACOMV1 120 mm ACOM slots version 1 S30861-K2249-X CP:ACOMV2 120 mm ACOM slots version 2 S30861-K2022-X CP:COBA/COSAV1 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 1 S30861-K2250-X CP:COBA/COSAV2 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 2 S30861-K2376-X CP:90MMV1 90 mm CU slots.

) Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . delivered without 2D-label Table 78 198 Relations between cover parts and modules (Cont.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB code number S30861-K2379-X article name CP:24MMV1 *) width 24 mm applicable for: front panel for MFDUAMCO_VX if HYBRID4 module is not installed *) CP:24MMV1consists of part C50117-A200-C841.

AC/DC frame air duct air flaps front cover Figure 196 Components of the AC/DC frame Complete the air duct as displayed in Figure 197 and in Figure 198 steps as follows: – Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. The AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below. so that the flaps will be opened by the air outlet stream. the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack can be necessary. – Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings. but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connectors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame. Complete the air duct first.10.1 Rack completion Nonstandard installation works Installation of the AC/DC frame If an already installed BS-240 should be extended with Service2 racks to provide a longer battery backup time. Figure 197 Fitting of the air flaps DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 199 .10 4.

200 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Figure 198 Setup of the rubber sealing Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack as follows: – Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery tray. so that the connectors can be easy moved inside the hole. – Pay attention to the correct cable no. – Plug-in cable no. – Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes. because the connectors can not pulled out without any damages. The cable is provided with AC/DC frame 2. – Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the rack and select the fan cables no. – Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC frame 1 (see Figure 200) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2. 51 and no. 51 52 Figure 199 Plug-in of the fan cables Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2: – Mount the prepared air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws provided with the air duct parts (see Figure 200). 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. 52.

89 91 114 AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 2 Figure 202 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2 DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 201 . 114 at the connector position as displayed in Figure 201. 91 screw AC/DC frame 1 Figure 200 Air duct mounting. – Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 91 and 114 as shown in Figure 202. – Plug-in the interconnection cable no.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion disconnect cable no. disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. – Connect the cables no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in Figure 201 at AC/DC frame 2. 91 89 114 114 AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2 Figure 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable – Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.

– Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2. In case of BS-240 II Service2 racks the cables no. black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 to the ACTC of the Service1 rack. 202 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . 229. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2). 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2. – Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB – Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires. 229 remove jumper 229 Figure 204 Routing of the battery breaker cable Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2: – Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Figure 205) during the fitting. – Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1). – Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2). 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-240 Service2 are used. 110/4M and 111/4M (BAT3) have to be connect (see figure below). 107/A 108/B 107/A 108/A 107/B 107/B 108/B 111/4M 108/A 111/3M 110/3M 110/4M AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2 Figure 203 Connection of DC and battery cables – Route the cable no. – Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of the cable no. – Connect the cables no. Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 rack and connect battery systems BAT2 and BAT3.

10. A minimum distance of 20 mm between DC. The system cabling is already installed in the factory. The batterie-upgrade requires the following parts: • • • Mounting kit S30861-K2350-X MK:TRAYV1 (cables.g.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion press Figure 205 Fitting of the fans. 50A battery main breaker in a BS-240. This section provides information for setup additional system cables for extension of RF modules or the cell configuration must be changed. is the precondition to integrate BS-240 II batteries. provided with the installation material. type of combining. capacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site. breaker) The following installation scenarios may be possible: • • f Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an unused battery string of a BS-240 “Lambda”-AC/DC system with frames F:AC/DC1 or F:AC/DC2. follow the instructions of the mounting guideline S30861K2350-X-*-7428. Cabling configurations depend on the different equipping variants (e. closing the AC/DC frame 4.. Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an existing BS-240 or BS-240 II battery set. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 203 .and signal lines and single insulated AClines is mandatory. 4. the relevant battery string must be separated fro mthe DC_supply by switching OFF the relevant 50ADC breaker of the Service1 rack.11 Setup of system cabling The system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the rack.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racks The mechanical and electrical preparation of the BS-240 Service Racks with AC/DC systems from the supplier “Lambda”. mounting guideline) Frame F:Battery Tray S30861-B4076-X Mounting kit MK:BATTFIXCBFVx S30861-K4258-X (battery fitting. During the installations works. in order to expand the battery capacity. WARNING! Before starting the battery-upgrading procedure.

Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB System cables will be shipped in a box to avoid twisting and damage. Before starting the connection procedure. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . The list of variant numbers (content of the site specific documentation) is needed for the correct setup of the cabling between the modules. g 204 NOTE For further informations refer to “Configuration Rules for System Cabling”. refer to the site documentation and determine the types and number of cables.

90°.90°.00 Nm and at SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0.6/7 C39195-Z80C118 1250 mm RX SMC.086 Al DUAMCO 0/3CU 0/1.141 Al FICOM-0/3 CU 0/1.90°.male semi-rigid .6/7 C39195-Z80C114 1050 mm TX SMA.141 Al DUAMCO 1/2CU 2/3. Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors! Figure 206 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable The following table provides an overview of the types and functionality of the prefabricated cables.male semi-rigid .male semi-rigid .86 AI) must be ensured.male/ SMA.90°.4/5 C39195-Z80C113 1600 mm RX SMC.male semi-rigid .90°.male/ SMA.male/ SMC.90°.141 Al FICOM-1/2 CU 2/3.male semi-rigid .male semi-rigid .4/5 C39195-Z80C160 1250 mm TX SMA.11.male semi-rigid .90°.90°.90°.male semi-rigid .90°.4/5 C39195-Z80C160 1250 mm TX SMA. Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1.male/ SMC.086 Al Table 79 DN0932994 code number Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 205 .141 AI) and 3.90°.6/7 C39195-Z80C114 1050 mm TX SMA.5 mm (semi-rigid .90°.141 Al DIAMCO-0 CU 1. connection length Path connector cable type DUAMCO 0/3CU 0/1.male/ SMA.086 Al DUAMCO 1/2CU 2/3.90°.4/6.086 Al DIAMCO-0/1 CU 0/5 C39195-Z80C117 750 mm RX SMC.35 Nm.90°.90°.90°.7 C39195-Z80C116 600 mm RX SMC.1 g Rack completion System cabling with semi-rigid cables NOTE A minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid.male/ SMA.2/3.male/ SMC.male/ SMC.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.

086 Al DUAMCO 0/1/2/3.4.90°.male/ Coax flexible cad N-Con.male .SMA.C39195-Z80CU 4/5/10/11 C118 1350 mm RX SMC.male .90°.141 Al DUAMCO 0/1/2/3.086 Al DUAMCO 0/1/2/3 CU 2/3/8/9 C39195-Z80C113 1600 mm RX SMC.male/ semi-rigid SMA.90°.6/7 Table 79 g code number Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II NOTE In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules.90°.male .90°.141 Al Table 80 206 length Path DIAMCO-1 CU 2/3.90°.90°.male/ semi-rigid SMC.141 Al DUAMCO 0/1/2/3.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB connection connector cable type C39195-Z80C116 600 mm RX SMC.90°.00 Nm).) connection code number length Path connector cable type DUAMCO 0/3.male .90°.male BIAS-T DIAMCO C39195-Z80C181 1450 mm RX SMA.90°.086 Al 1/2” jum-per cable semi-rigid . a short semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors (N-type.male/ semi-rigid N-Con.90°.CU 0/1/6/7 C39195-Z80C204 1650 mm TX SMA.male HPDU (Rack)DIAMCO C39195-Z80C174 1250 mm RX SMA.90°. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .male .90°.male/ 7/16.CU 0/1/6/7 C39195-Z80C206 1800 mm RX SMC.90°. female) of the modules.141 Al HPDUFICOM (Rack) C39195-Z80C173 400 mm TX 7/16. 1.C39195-Z80CU 2/3/8/9 C160 1250 mm TX SMA.90°.90°.90°.HPDU C39195-Z80C180 410 mm RX SMA.90°.male/ semi-rigid SMC.141 Al Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II (Cont.male .141 Al BIAS-T .male/ semi-rigid SMA.C39195-Z80CU 4/5/10/11 C114 1050 mm TX SMA.90°.male/ SMA.90°.male .90°.male/ semi-rigid N-Con. Avoid the twisting of the cable connectors during the connection.male DIAMCO (Rack 0) DIAMCO (Rack 1) C39195-Z80C176 2700 mm Cas.male .90°.male/ semi-rigid SMA.90°.086 Al DUAMCO 0/3.90°.male semi-rigid . Fix the cable at the N-type connectors and screw the connection to a “fingertight” torque (approx.male/ SMC.male/ semi-rigid SMC.

Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors! The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules (CUs.which has not been equipped with cableretainers -with flexible HF cables. The task of these cable retainers .2 g Rack completion System Cabling with flexi-cables NOTE Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1. Route the cables. so that the LED-indications of the modules are visible and the test adapter connectors are accessible. Combiners and FANs). Figure 207 Example of system cabling with flexible cables g DN0932994 NOTE The minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm.If a customer decides to retrofit an 1th generation base station . these cables must be loosely fitted with cable-ties.00 Nm and at SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0. g NOTE Attention: Fitting of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed for base stations equipped with these cable retainers. The exceptional length of the cables have to be stored inside the vertical space between the subracks and the rack. Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 207 . This space is used as an air inlet for cooling.35 Nm. come with a pair of cableretainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (exception: lowest subrack of a cabinet).11. For this reason BTS Base-/Extension cabinets which have been equipped with flexible HF cabling in the factory always. The minimum repeated bending radius is 40 mm. The horizontal space below each subrack have not to be used to store the extra length of the system cables or anything else.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4.which are bended sheet metal parts .is to keep those flexible HF-cables in a neat position which inter-connect subracks.

male/ SMC.90°. GCU S30864-X217-A54 800 mm TX SMA.FCU.90°.FCU.female/ SMC.90°.male ACOM .90°.male/ SMA.male/ SMA.90°.90°.male/ SMC. GCU S30864-X217-A15 1400 mm RX SMC. ECU.FCU.FCU. EDGE-CU or GCU.90°. GCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA. GCU S30864-X217-A49 600 mm TX SMA.male/ SMA.male/ SMA.90°.FCU.90°.male/ SMC. GCU S30864-X217-A48 400 mm RX SMC.90°. ECU.FCU.male ACOM .FCU. ECU.male ACOM . ECU.male/ SMC.90°.90°. GCU S30864-X217-A24 1250 mm TX SMA.90°.90°.90°.90°.female ACOM . GCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC.90°. ECU. ECU.90°. ECU.90°.90°.FCU.FCU.90°. GCU S30864-X217-A51 1200 mm RX SMC.male ACOM .90°. ECU.FCU. GCU S30864-X217-A25 1050 mm TX SMA. connection length Path connector ACOM .male ACOM .90°.male/ SMA. ECU. GCU Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 .female ACOM . GCU S30864-X217-A50 1000 mm RX SMC.FCU. GCU S30864-X217-A23 1600 mm TX SMA.90°.male/ SMC. GCU S30864-X217-A13 1600 mm RX SMC.male ACOM . ECU.male ACOM .male/ SMA.FCU.FCU. GCU S30864-X217-A53 1800 mm TX SMA. ECU. GCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC. GCU S30864-X217-A27 750 mm RX SMC.90°. ECU. ECU.male ACOM .FCU.female ACOM .male Table 81 208 code number BS-240 II / 240 XL II.90°. ECU. ECU.male/ SMA.FCU.90°.male ACOM .FCU. ECU.male ACOM .90°. make sure that the system cables are installed as listed in the following table.male ACOM .female/ SMC.90°.90°.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB g NOTE If a CU will be replaced by a FlexCU.male ACOM .female/ SMC. system cables ACOM .FCU.male/ SMA. GCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA.90°. ECU.90°.

35 Nm. Later removal of terminators must done with extreme care.00 Nm and at SMC connectors with a torque wrench set 0.3 Rack completion NOTE In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules. the connectors need not to be terminated. it is necessary to terminate all unused RX# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMC load resistor and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMA load resistor. N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight". In normal operation all open TX# inputs need not to be terminated. to avoid damages at the RF front connectors of the modules. a short semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors (N-type. Connector suppliers recommends a torque of approx.00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable connectors during the connection. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used. FICOM: In normal operation all open TX connectors need not to be terminated. it is necessary to terminate all unused RX# connectors and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm load resistors. DIAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used. An open expansion connector RF EXP has to be terminated with the terminator delivered with the FICOM base module.11. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 209 . female) of the modules. Terminators It is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohm load resistors.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB g 4. the connectors need not to be terminated. 1. There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail.The following resistors are used: – C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors – C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors Fix the terminators at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set 1. g NOTE DUAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used.

210 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential DN0932994 . In case that the BTS is remotely disconnected from the external power supply. a bag filled with Silica Gel is fitted into the rack by the factory. For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance.2 NOTE For dehydrating the rack during transportation and storage. g 4. It is recommended to remove the bag.12. f WARNING! The burning of rubbish should be avoided. Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure. as a burning of packaging material may give off toxic gases.12. the BTS-internal battery system must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery circuit breaker BR33 (located at the AD-panel of Service1 cabinet). Remove all packing material for later recycling. any garbage must be cleared from site. Close and lock the rack doors. please contact your sales representative. Ensure the site is secure or hand over to the person in charge / caretaker NOTE If the AC-supplied BTS will be not switched ON after the finished installation and is in non-operational state disconnected from power supply. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment. all its AC circuit breakers must be switched OFF to deenergize the system reliably. because after a certain time the bag lost his function. Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in the countries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.12 4.1 Post installation notes Leaving the site The following instructions must carried before leaving the site: – – – – g At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.Rack completion Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 4. If all installation activities are finished.

All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. DN0932994 Id:0900d8058088d65c Confidential 211 .Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Rack completion Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding the disposal of electrical and electronic equipment.

T20. TMA mounting) – Vacuum cleaner – Hard hat – Dust mask – Safety goggles – Safety gloves – 4 ft step ladder 212 Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential DN0932994 . T15. T10. 18 mm (for fixing of earthquake mounting kit only) – Fall protection equipment for working in dangerous heights (e.1 Installation tools The following tools are necessary to install the base stations: – Standard toolkit for BSS-installation H89999-B633 – Tool set for BS-24x installation H89999-B148 – ESD safety tool set H89999-B635-V1 – Spirit level – Tape measure – Scissors – Plate shears – Screw driver for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm – Torque wrench for SMA connectors 0. M12.. 8. T25. M4.74 ft Ib (1. M8 – Stripping knife for 1/2” RF cables – Trimming tool for 1/2” coaxial cables – Flat brush.: 72942 Gr.Appendix Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 5 Appendix 5. M10.0 Nm). M42 (SW 19. T40. T50 (length 200 mm) – Long screwdriver for torx screws T30 (length 400 mm) – Engineer‘s wrenches for M12.:734650-1) – 90° offset screw driver for torx screws T20 – Adjuster feed wrench M42 (SW65) – Flat spanner SW19. M5.g.25 ft Ib (0. M3. 17. SW50 – Hammer drill with twisted drills widia. T25 – Screwdrivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm – Screwdriver for slotted screw M3. 20 mm width – Hot air gun or butane torch – Crimping tool (Hoffmann Order Nr. 10. 35 or Tyco AMP Order Nr.35 Nm) – Torque wrench 32 mm (12. 19. M8. 13. T30. diameter 8 mm. 24 mm) – Torx screw drivers for security screw (with pin) T10. M16 (7. M4. SMC connectors 0. 65 mm) – Ratchet with insets for nuts M4. M6.. M6. M5 – Screwdriver for pozi drive screws M2. M5.35 Nm) for 7/16” connector mounting – Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6) – Isolated torque wrench for Torx T30 (6 Nm) and open ended 17 mm (20 Nm) for battery mounting – screwdriver for torx screws T8.

A500-C101-B261) – heat-shrink set including: heat-shrink sleeve for 1/2” coaxial cables (with adhesive coating). antennas.2 Ancillary material The following ancillary materials are needed: – adhesive tape – cable ties in different lengths – wire end sleeves for 16 mm² copper wires – cable lugs M8 – paint retouch kit (order no. cleaning tissue. transmission equipment. emery paper DN0932994 Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential 213 .nokiasiemensnetworks. heat protection tape. Refer for additional information to the Tool and Testequipment Database in the Intranet: https://tte-support.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Appendix Additional tools may be necessary for the installation of the power supply equipment.inside. cable-ways and other infrastructure equipment.com/tte/ 5.

of CU per Cell 1 .5 W 12.Appendix Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 5.5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc mains input voltage (nominal): input voltage range: frequency (nominal): frequency range: 3 x 230 Vac 207 Vac to 253 Vac 50 Hz 45 Hz to 65 Hz AC/DC converter nominal output power 1600 W power consumption: TMA AMCO MUCO CU (GSM) ECU (Edge) FCU COBA COSA DC panel frame ACOM battery set 9W 25. microwave CU per single rack: max. 8 multiple cell per BTSE max.5 W 150 W per module 210 W per module 310 W per module 17 W 17 W 10 W 60 W 43 W 20 W location condition: indoor Abis link media: wire.1 Technical data Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II BS-240 IIB overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1600 x 600 x 450 mm 1530 x 600 x 450 mm weights: rack (unequipped): frame with 4 ACOM frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM frame with 4 CU frame with 6 AC/DC frame with battery set* DC Panel *dependend on battery type 60 kg / 60 kg 40 kg / 40 kg 40 kg / 40 kg 30 kg / 30 kg 27 kg / 35 kg 130-180 kg / 130-180 kg 10 kg 40 kg 30 kg 30 kg 25 kg 35 kg 130-180 kg 10 kg mains input voltage (nominal): -48 Vdc input voltage range: -40.3.3 5. 12 no. fibre optic.12 Table 82 214 2000 W Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential DN0932994 .

3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm) terminal block (max.2 BS-240 IIB 7/16.Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II external interfaces: TX/RX antenna Abis interface ground connection external alarms LMT 5. BS-240 terminal block (max. AWG 2). female terminal block (120 Ohm) or 1. AWG 6). female. BS-240XL / XL II bolt M8 spring terminal blocks SubD 15.5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc mains input voltage (nominal): input voltage range: frequency (nominal): frequency range: 3 x 230 Vac 207 Vac to 253 Vac 50 Hz 45 Hz to 65 Hz AC/DC converter nominal output power 1600 W Table 83 DN0932994 2000 W Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential 215 . AWG 8) terminal block (max.3.0/2.) Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB Parameter BS-240XL / 240 XL II BS-240 XL IIB overall dimensions (HxWxD) 2025 x 600 x 450 mm 1831 x 600 x 450 mm weights: rack (unequipped): frame with 4 ACOM frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM frame with 4 CU frame with 6 AC/DC frame with battery set* DC Panel *dependend on battery type 80 kg / 80 kg 40 kg /40 kg 40 kg / 40 kg 30 kg / 30 kg 27 kg / 35 kg 130-180 kg / 130-180 kg 15 kg 50 kg 30 kg 30 kg 25 kg 35 kg 130-180 kg 15 kg mains input voltage (nominal): -48 Vdc input voltage range: -40. BS-240 II. RJ45 connector mains input AC mains input DC Table 82 Appendix Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB (Cont.

AWG 2 ground connection external alarms LMT bolt M8 spring terminal blocks SubD 15.5 W 150 W per module 210 W per module 310 W per module 17 W 17 W 10 W 60 W 43 W 20 W location condition: indoor Abis link media: wire . RJ45 connector Table 83 216 BS-240XL / 240 XL II Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB (Cont. microwave CU per single rack: max.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm) terminal block (max.) Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential DN0932994 . 12 external interfaces: TX/RX antenna Abis interface BS-240 XL IIB mains input AC mains input DC 7/16. AWG 8) terminal block (max.0/2.Appendix Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB Parameter power consumption: TMA AMCO MUCO CU (GSM) ECU (Edge) FCU COBA COSA DC panel frame ACOM battery set 9W 25. female. fibre optic. female terminal block (120 Ohm) or 1.5 W 12.

Installing BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB 5.4 Appendix Checklist for Base Station Installation Check Item Yes No Rack fixed to floor and wall (wall excepted in erthquake zones) Grounding BTS connected to ground as described in section “External Cabling Activities” Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cable window of the building Power Supply Cross section of power supply cable sufficient power supply connection correspondend to TNS-or TT Network requirements Cable window of the installation building equipped with lightning conductor Cross section correspondend to cable length External Alarms External alarm cables with braided screen Cable screen contacted to metal lid of cable feeding module Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends Overvoltage protection equipment present and correct installed PCM Cables PCM cables with braided screen Cable screens connected with EMI panel of rack Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends Overvoltage protection equipment correct installed (if present) Antenna Cables Outer conductor of antenna cables connected to ground at antenna window Grounding of antenna cables between antenna and antenna window correpondend to grounding guideline Antenna cable conductor protected against humidity at the ground points Table 84 DN0932994 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation Id:0900d805805b0be3 Confidential 217 .